advertisement
User Manual
identiFINDER
®
R300
Digital Handheld Gamma Spectrometer with
Radionuclide Identi cation
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection
This document is changed in accordance with our Quality Management system. All changes are archived.
Revision identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
Product FLIR identiFINDER R300
Language English (en)
Version 2014.4 (13623)
Latest Change February 19, 2015 at 13:49 (UTC-0600h) nanoRaider
® is a registered trademark of FLIR Detection, Inc.
FLIR
® is a registered trademark of FLIR Systems, Inc.
All other trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Copyright © 2012–2015 FLIR Detection, Inc.
All rights reserved.
2 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection CONTENTS
Contents
9
1 Welcome 17
1.1
Conventions Used in This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
1.2
Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
1.3
Before First Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Unpacking and Identifying Accessories
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
Instrument Description and Application Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
2 Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 27
2.1
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
2.2
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
Using Command Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Choosing from Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
2.2.2.1
Scrolling in Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Changing Values
Entering Text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Composite Values
Changing Numerical Values
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering the Password
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
40
41
43
46
2.2.8
Taking Screenshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Holster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
Operating the Web Server Pages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
2.4.2
Tables on Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
Records on Web Pages
Printing Web Pages
Password Entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administration Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
59
59
60
2.5
Starting Up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 3
CONTENTS FLIR Detection
2.6
Shutting Down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
2.7
Low Power Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
2.8
Resetting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
3 Field Operating Guide 69
3.1
Switching On and Checking the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
3.2
Observing the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
3.2.1
3.2.2
Gamma Radiation Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
Neutron Radiation Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
3.3
Locating a Radiation Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
3.4
Identifying a Radiation Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
3.5
Communicate with a Local Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
3.6
Sending Results to a Remote Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
3.7
Switching Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
4 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes
85
4.1
Dose Rate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
4.3
Identi ication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
4.4
Automated Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
Remote-Controlled Spectrum Acquisition
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
5 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Alarms
97
5.1
Gamma Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
5.2
Neutron Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.3
Sigma Noti ications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6 FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
103
Complete Option Menus (Outline)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6.2
Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.3
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.4
Identi ication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.6
Nuclide Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.7
Nuclide Severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.8
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.9
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.10
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.11
GPS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection CONTENTS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.13
Clear Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.14
Show Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.15
Reset Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.16
Erase All Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.17
Erase All Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.20
Automated Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.21
Send Identi ication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.22
Send Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.23
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.23.1
Bluetooth SPP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.23.2
Bluetooth SPP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.23.3
Bluetooth Periphery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.24
Remote Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
6.26
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.27
Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6.28
Download Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6.29
Gamma, Neutron Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6.30
Finder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.31
Dose Rate Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.32
Alarm Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.33
Dose Alarm Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.35
Neutron Alarm Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6.36
Current Alarm State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
7 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer
167
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7.2
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a Mass Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
7.3
Preparing the USB Network Connection on a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
7.3.1
Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
7.3.2
7.3.3
Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Windows Vista, Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7.4
Using the Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 5
CONTENTS FLIR Detection
8 Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
179
8.1
Info (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8.3
General (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.3.1
8.3.2
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Identi ication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.5.2
Gamma Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Bluetooth SPP Settings (Web Page)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Bluetooth SPP Settings (Web Page)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
8.9
Backup (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
8.10
Bulk Download (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
8.11.1
Identi ication Details (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
8.12
Spectra (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
8.12.1
Spectrum Details (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.13.1
Alarm Details (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8.14
Screenshots (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
8.16
Live Spectrum (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8.19
System Files (Web Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
9 Sending Data to a Remote Server 219
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
6 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection CONTENTS
10 Connecting via Satellite Phone
223
Pairing the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Satellite Phone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
10.2
Con iguring Remote Server Settings for the Satellite Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
11 Powering the FLIR identiFINDER R300 229
11.1
External Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
11.1.1
Wall Mounted Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11.2
Charging the FLIR identiFINDER R300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11.2.1
Charging Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
11.3
Battery Power Saving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
12 Accessories for the FLIR identiFINDER R300
233
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
235
237
identiFINDER R 300: Speci ications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
A.2
Detector Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
A.3
Optimum Illumination of Detector Crystals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
FLIR identiFINDER R300: Manufacturer’s declaration of conformity (CE)
244
A.6
Bluetooth Serial Port Pro ile (SPP) Communication Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
A.6.1
Bluetooth Device Name and PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
A.6.2
Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
A.6.3
Conventions and Usage Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
A.6.4
General Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
A.6.6
General Error Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
A.7.4
Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
A.7.5
Dose Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
A.7.6
Neutron Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 7
CONTENTS FLIR Detection
B Maintenance 255
B.1
Field Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
B.2
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
B.3
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
B.4
After Sales Service and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
C Nuclide Library 259
267
291
8 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection List of Figures
List of Figures
1 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 with accessories
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
2 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 with accessories in Pelican carrying case
. . . . . . . . . .
22
3 Name plate at the rear side of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
4 Functional units of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (see text).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
5 Map of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
6 Surveying an object with the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
7 Papercraft model of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with operating elements: Display,
LEDs and keys.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
8 Anatomy of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 display.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
10 Right-handed operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with normal key assignments
.
33
11 Left-handed operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with reverse key key assigments
34
12 Skipping commands for value editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
13 Choosing from a menu: Initial state without chosen item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
14 Choosing from a menu: Choosing the next item with Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
15 Choosing from a menu: Choosing other items with Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
16 Choosing from a menu: After executing the command with Select . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
17 Choosing from a menu: Scrolling in long menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
18 Changing Values: Choosing the setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
19 Changing Values: Selected entry ield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
20 Changing Values: Changed entry ield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
21 Changing Values: Revealing more commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
22 Changing Values: Changed setting accepted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
23 Changing Combined Values: Changing the selected component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
24 Changing Combined Values: Selecting components.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
25 Changing Numerical Values: Changing the selected digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
26 Changing Numerical Values: Selecting digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
27 Editing Text: First character “J” is selected.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
28 Editing Text: Next character to the right is selected (“o”).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
29 Editing Text: Set of available characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 9
List of Figures FLIR Detection
30 Editing Text: After changing the selected “o” to an “a”.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
31 Editing Text: About to delete the selected character “h”.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
32 Editing Text: After deleting a character, the next character is selected.
. . . . . . . . . . .
45
33 Editing Text: After inserting space before “ Doe” for an additional character.
. . . . . . .
46
34 Editing Text: Done.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
35 Entering a password to access the option menus.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
36 Password entered but not yet con irmed.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
37 Message after entering a wrong password.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
38 Status display showing the number of saved screenshots.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
39 Inserting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 into a holster so alarm LEDs remain visible
. . .
50
40 FLIR identiFINDER R300 in a belt holster with visible alarm LEDs
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
41 Anatomy of a FLIR identiFINDER R300 web page, narrow layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
42 Anatomy of a FLIR identiFINDER R300 web page, wide layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
43 Visible menu hierarchy on a web page with narrow layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
44 Single submenu on a web page with wide layout
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
45 Anatomy of a web page with a data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
46 Anatomy of a web page with details of a record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
47 Web page section with GPS coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
48 Steps of the transmission of data to a reachback server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
49 Successful transmission of data to a reachback server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
50 Example printout of measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
51 Entering the password before accessing protected web pages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
52 Entering the administration password
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
53 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300: Product identi ication . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
54 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300: Starting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
55 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300: Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
56 FLIR identiFINDER R300 after powering up.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
57 Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
58 Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 during an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
59 Battery almost empty.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
60 Schematic timing of triple beeps indicating low power conditions.
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
61 Low Power Dose Rate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
62 Battery is empty.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
63 Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300: General system status . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
64 Dose Rate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
65 Surveying an object with the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
66 Dose rate warning reported on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
10 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection List of Figures
67 Optimum posture for neutron detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
68 Finder mode: Initial background measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
69 Finder mode: Continuous measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
70 Spectrum acquisition in Identi ication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
71 Finding the position for best measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
72 Identi ication results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
73 Spectrum the identi ication is based upon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
74 Valid IP address after a connection was established . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
75 The FLIR identiFINDER R300’s home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
76 Table of identi ication result records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
77 Details of an identi ication result record
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
78 Identi ication results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
79 Identi ication result summary for sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
80 Data transmission progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
81 Ready to search for Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
82 List of suitable Bluetooth devices detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
83 Pairing with a Bluetooth device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
84 Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
85 Cycling the manual modes Dose Rate, Finder, and Identi ication . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
86 While Finder mode is disabled, cycling modes will toggle between Dose Rate and Identi ication modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
87 Dose Rate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
88 Detector overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
89 Finder mode: Initial background measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
90 Finder mode: Continuous measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
91 Identi ication Mode: Progress display during time limited data acquisition . . . . . . . .
90
92 Identi ication Mode: Count rate too low for best results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
93 Identi ication Mode: Count rate too high for best results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
94 Identi ication Mode: Progress display during count limited data acquisition . . . . . . .
92
95 Identi ication Mode: Identi ication was not possible.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
96 Identi ication Mode: Identi ied radionuclides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
97 Countdown announcing the start of a scheduled measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
98 Automated measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
99 Message during remote-controlled spectrum acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
100 Dose rate display with alarm indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
101 Alarm display: Dose rate warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
102 Alarm display: Dose rate alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 11
List of Figures FLIR Detection
103 Gamma alarms as announced by the red LED, beeper, and vibrator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
104 Alarm display: Neutron alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
105 Neutron incidents as announced by the blue LED, beeper, and vibrator . . . . . . . . . . 101
106 Dose rate display with 𝜎 noti ication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
107 Hierarchy of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
108 Anatomy of the spectrum display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
109 Spectrum information around the chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
110 Acquiring spectrum data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
111 Acquiring spectrum data while the duration is preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
112 Spectrum with cursor at local peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
113 ROI Speci ication: Moving the cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
114 ROI Speci ication: Marking the irst ROI boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
115 ROI Speci ication: Marking the second ROI boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
116 Spectrum Scale: Complete spectrum visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
117 Spectrum Scale: First half of spectrum visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
118 Spectrum Scale: One display pixel equals the width of one spectral channel . . . . . . . 112
119 Spectrum Scale: The de ined ROI its into the available screen width . . . . . . . . . . . 113
120 Choosing a saved spectrum to be loaded for display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
121 Radionuclides identi ied in the current spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
122 Checking the calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
123 Upper items of the identi ication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
124 Top of the nuclide list used by the identi ication algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
125 Usage information in the nuclide list used by the identi ication algorithm . . . . . . . . 120
126 Severity information in the nuclide list used by the identi ication algorithm . . . . . . . 121
127 Preset times for spectrum data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
128 Display settings in daytime colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
129 Display settings in nighttime colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
130 Display settings in classic colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
131 Setting date and time while GPS clock is not available.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
132 Clock Settings: Selecting the time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
133 Clock Settings: Selecting the time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
134 GPS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
135 Entering a new password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
136 Entering a new password: Con irmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
137 Removing the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
138 FLIR identiFINDER R300 status display: System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
139 FLIR identiFINDER R300 status display: GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
12 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection List of Figures
140 Reestablishing the factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
141 Deleting saved spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
142 Starting a self test of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
143 Testing the annunciators.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
144 Automated Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
145 Sending Data: Choosing a record of identi ication results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
146 Sending Data: Identi ication summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
147 Sending Data: Incomplete settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
148 Sending Data: Transmission progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
149 Sending Data: Mission accomplished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
150 Sending Data: Choosing a spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
151 Sending Data: Spectrum summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
152 Bluetooth SPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
153 Bluetooth SPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
154 Bluetooth Periphery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
155 SPP Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
156 Ready to search for Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
157 Searching for Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
158 No devices detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
159 List of suitable Bluetooth devices detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
160 Selecting a PIN for the pairing of Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
161 Pairing with a Bluetooth device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
162 Paired to a Bluetooth device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
163 Pairing to a Bluetooth device failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
164 Upper items of the remote server settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
165 Starting the USB mass storage mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
166 The FLIR identiFINDER R300 in USB mass storage mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
167 Network settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
168 Report settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
169 Download settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
170 Gamma counter information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
171 Gamma and neutron counter information (Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
172 Finder settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
173 Dose rate settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
174 Alarm indication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
175 Dose alarm threshold settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 13
List of Figures FLIR Detection
176 Dose rate alarm threshold settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
177 Neutron alarm threshold settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
178 Current Alarm State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
179 Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Mini USB-B connector) and a computer (USB-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
180 USB socket covered by a lap in the rubber boot
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
181 Plugging and unplugging the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
182 Do not bend the cable or the plug!
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
183 FLIR identiFINDER R300 mounted as mass storage device on a computer running Microsoft Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
184 FLIR RNDIS driver installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
185 Beginning of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
186 Installation warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
187 End of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
188 Windows XP reporting new hardware at the noti ication area.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
189 Windows XP New Hardware Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
190 Specifying a driver source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
191 Installation warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
192 End of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
193 FLIR RNDIS driver installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
194 Installation warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
195 Beginning of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
196 End of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
197 Windows 7 reporting and con iguring new hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
198 End of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
199 Valid addresses of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 after a connection to a computer was established . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
201 Resources web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
203 The GPS and Clock settings web page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
204 Alarm Settings web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
205 Connectivity Settings web page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
206 Bluetooth Settings web page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
207 Nuclide Settings web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
209 Bulk download web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
14 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection List of Figures
210 Table of identi ication result records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
211 Details of an identi ication result record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
212 Table of spectrum records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
213 Details of a spectrum record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
215 Details of an alarm record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
217 The FLIR identiFINDER R300’s screen live in the web interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
218 Empty live spectrum page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
219 Live spectrum page during data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
220 Identi ication results of a live spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
222 Web page to change the administrator password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
224 A possible scenario for remote handling of FLIR identiFINDER R300 data . . . . . . . . 219
225 Connection for uploading FLIR identiFINDER R300 data to a remote server . . . . . . . 221
226 Select ”Change Device” if an unwanted device is paired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
227 ”Prepare your Bluetooth devices…” appears after selecting ”Change device” . . . . . . . 224
228 Searching for Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
229 No Bluetooth devices detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
230 Detected SD1000 device entry chosen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
231 Selecting a PIN for the pairing of Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
232 Bluetooth Periphery Information: Pairing is in progress...
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
233 Pairing to a Bluetooth device failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
234 The Device Details indicates successfull pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
235 Power Supply: Removing the international adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
236 Power Supply: Attaching an international adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
237 Source set (sold separately)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
238 Position of the detector centers of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
239 Optimal dose rate calculation needs a uniform illumination of the three detector crystals, for which the source to detector distance should be at least 15 cm (6 in) (drawn to scale).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
240 Recommended setup for unmanned measurements of fast neutrons
. . . . . . . . . . . . 243
241 After uploading a software package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
242 Full width at half maximum height of a peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
243 Ionizing radiation warning symbol (ISO 21482)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
244 Multi Channel Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 15
List of Figures FLIR Detection
245 Shielding of ionizing radiation (not to scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
16 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 1. Welcome
Chapter 1
Welcome
This chapter offers introductory information about this manual, some important advice for your safety and that of the instrument, and a general overview of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and its accessories.
1.1
Conventions Used in This Document
This document uses the following conventions to signify various kinds of text.
Ordinary Text looks like this, sometimes bold or italics is used for emphasis.
Constant Width
is used for URLs, ile names, path names, text you have to enter somewhere.
Information about danger for yourself, an instrument, or data.
Information you should carefully consider before proceeding.
Additional information you should pay attention to.
A tip suggests commands or procedures for advanced usage. You might skip tips on your irst pass through this document.
Information related to particular variants of the product.
The path to a command or setting in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 menu hierarchy or the web interface, respectively, is displayed at the beginning of appropriate sections as shown in the following examples:
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Settings
Settings (p.
ä
General (p.
184 )
ä
Identi cation
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 17
1.2. Safety Warnings FLIR Detection
If you read this manual as a PDF document, you can click cross references, items in the table of contents, links into the Internet or similar to immediately view the designated item.
1.2
Safety Warnings
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is designed for outdoor use. When operated in accordance with the operating instructions, it should not present any hazard to the operator.
The housing is essential to the integrity and safe operation of the instrument. Under no circumstances should the housing be tampered with, penetrated, or otherwise removed except for normal access to the external connectors (see chapter
, p.
and 11 , p.
229 ).
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is not certi ied for use in explosive environments.
The power adapter is connected to line power. Normal care in handling such a line power device should be exercised. In particular this unit should not be connected to line power if it is wet.
The nature of the application is such that objects being surveyed with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 could emit radioactive radiation with hazardous intensity.
1.3
Before First Use
We recommend charging the batteries of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 after unpacking ( 11.2
, p.
230 ) prior to irst time use.
This is a good time to get familiar with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 by reading this manual.
Please read at least the rest of this chapter and those on basic operation (chapters 2 , p.
27 and 3 , p.
69 ) before starting to experiment with the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Chapter 2 , p.
27 explains the principles of operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to get you prepared for a typical survey you will be guided through in chapter 3 , p.
69 .
The fundamental modes of operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 are detailed in chapter
, followed by explanations of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 alarms in chapter
, p.
.
A detailed reference on all the commands is given in chapter
, p.
, which you should read to know about all the features and possibilities in case you need them.
Chapter
explains how to setup the connection of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a local computer. The web interface for monitoring, con iguring and transferring data is detailed in chapter
18 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 1. Welcome
The setup for sending data to a remote server (reachback) is explained in chapter 9 , p.
219
Chapter 11 , p.
229 details the power supply for the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
The appendix comprises speci ication data (Appendix
237 ), maintenance information (Ap-
pendix B , p.
255 ), information about the nuclides the FLIR identiFINDER R300 can identify (Appendix C , p.
259 ), a glossary of terms and abbreviations (Appendix
, p.
) and, inally, an index
(p.
)
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is available in several variants (see
, p.
for detailed speci ications). All variants share almost identical operating procedures and are covered in this manual. The few places where a feature of a certain variant differs from the main stream are marked accordingly in the text.
1.4 The FLIR identiFINDER R300
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 instrument, engineered and manufactured by FLIR Detection is a digital, self-contained battery-powered instrument that provides the power of advanced spectroscopy in your palm. It is part of the FLIR Detection family of instruments designed to provide critical capabilities required in a wide range of mission circumstances. Such capabilities include:
• Search for sources of gamma radiation or scan areas contaminated with gamma radionuclides
• Automatic identi ication of radionuclides by analysis of gamma ray spectra
• Gamma dose and dose rate measurements
• Neutron detection with count rate and accumulated counts (Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.)
• Semi-conductor detector for improved resolution and ruggedness
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 combines the capabilities of a Personal Radiation Detector (PRD) with the radionuclide identi ication capabilities of a Radio-Isotope Identi ication Detector (RIID) into one conveniently small package. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 utilizes the same reliable advanced technology that is deployed in the well-known identiFINDER 2 family of instruments. We offer a family of handheld products to address the various applications operators will encounter while ensuring operators will be presented with the same screens, information, and operation between all our devices.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 19
1.5. Unpacking and Identifying Accessories FLIR Detection
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is designed for the survey of objects ranging from small packages to large objects such as freight containers to search for illicit traf icking of radioactive material, to scan containers for radiation leaks, to monitor medical waste or scrap metal, you name it. It will detect and identify radioactive materials. If the type or quantity of radioactive material exceeds pre-set alarm levels then this information will be provided to you.
In particular, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will identify threat objects. A threat object is de ined as radioactive material whose signature is consistent with that of material that could be used for terrorist purposes. Threat materials are usually those used in a nuclear explosive device or which could be used in Radiological Dispersive Devices (“Dirty” bombs).
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 incorporates advanced physics algorithms that allow any user to make highly sophisticated scienti ic measurements. The two button interface and simple menu structure were designed so that it can be operated with minimal training. The high degree of automation allows for successful operation even in distracting and hostile environments. The instrument is very robust and stable even in the most demanding conditions and can be operated successfully with only a few buttons.
Outstanding features are:
• Large Cadmium Zinc Telluride (CZT) detector for fast and accurate identi ication
• Brilliant color display with 320×240 pixels, that is easy to read in all lighting conditions
• Large database capacity for more than half a million spectra or other data
• GPS receiver to log incident locations
• Wired communication via standard USB interface
• Wireless communication via Bluetooth for reachback
• Web interface for monitoring and con iguration of the instrument without additional PC software
… and many more. See
for the complete speci ications.
1.5
Unpacking and Identifying Accessories
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is available in several variants (see
, p.
) which are shipped with their accessories (Figure
, p.
A
..
B
..
C
..
FLIR identiFINDER R300 instrument with rubber boot and wrist strap string
Wrist Strap (Lanyard)
Holster
20 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 1. Welcome
C
A
E
D
E
H
E
F
G B
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
Figure 1.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 with accessories
D
..
Wall power adapter with USB-A receptacle
E
..
International adapters for power adapter (US, Euro, UK)
F
..
Car power adapter with USB-A receptacle
G
..
Mini USB-B to USB-A cable for connection to local computer or power adapter (USB 2.0)
H
..
CD-ROM with manual and drivers
I
..
Pelican case
Review the parts and components received. In the event that a component cannot be located contact the appropriate support organization (see Chapter B.4
, p.
257 ).
A name plate (Figure 3 , p.
23 ) is attached to the rear side of the instrument. It lists the type of instrument, the serial number and other important information.
You might want to remember the serial number. It is sometimes used to identify the FLIR identiFINDER R300 in a computer network.
After the initial charge, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is ready for use.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 21
1.5. Unpacking and Identifying Accessories FLIR Detection
I
H
G
E
D E
F
E
B
C
A
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
Figure 2.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 with accessories in Pelican carrying case
22 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 1. Welcome
Model: nanoRaider
Variant: ZH
Serial: 103156000000
DOT: SP12131
Only for variants with a certain neutron detector.
Figure 3.
Name plate at the rear side of the FLIR identiFINDER R300
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 23
1.6. Instrument Description and Application Overview FLIR Detection
1.6
Instrument Description and Application Overview
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can be described as a small but powerful computer with keyboard and LCD screen further equipped with dedicated detectors for gamma and neutron radiation plus some auxiliary sensors such as a receiver for the NAVSTAR global positioning system (GPS). All data acquired by the sensors are recorded, processed and evaluated by a sophisticated software that discriminates innocent from threatening radiation even when operated by personnel with minimal training.
A general outline of the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s functional elements is given in Figure
, while Figure 5 , p.
26 helps to identify and locate the various components of the instrument.
• A microcomputer shown in the center of Figure
is the central element of the FLIR identiFINDER R300. It is connected to various peripherals for input, output, and communication.
• Green circles in the upper left part of Figure
represent input peripherals including the keys and, most prominently, the sensors for radioactive radiation:
– A cadmium zinc telluride (CZT, CdZnTe) semiconductor crystal to record gamma radiation spectra
– Two CdZnTe crystals for dose rate measurements
– A
3
He detector for neutron radiation (optional)
• Output of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is directed mainly to the screen plus some status lights, a beeper, and a vibrator symbolized by blue circles in Figure
.
• The light gray circles in Figure
represent elements accessible from the outside of the instrument like the communication facilities.
24 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 1. Welcome
3 for Neutrons
†
1 CdZnTe
.
Spectra
2 CdZnTe
.
Crystals for Dose Rate
Measurement
Detectors
.
Receiver
Server
.
Socket
.
.
Microcomputer
nication
Battery
.
.
.
Status
.
.
.
Gamma
Alarm
.
.
Alarm
†
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 4.
Functional units of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (see text).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 25
1.6. Instrument Description and Application Overview FLIR Detection
Op erating Keys
Detector
Status LED
Display
Neutron Detector equipped with a neutron detector.
Beeper
Neutron Alarm LED
Gamma Alarm LED
USB Socket
Figure 5.
Map of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 components
GPS
Bluetooth
26 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Chapter 2
Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is optimized for single-handed operation (see Figure 6 , p.
27 ). The detector should point to the object to be surveyed while you watch the display and control the instrument by pressing the keys with thumb and middle inger.
For best dose rate calculations the source must not be too close to the instrument (Figure 239 , p.
242 ).
Figure 6.
Surveying an object with the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 display consists of a color LCD screen and several LEDs (Figure 7 , p.
28 ).
The fundamental principle of operation is to choose one of the available options and then execute the associated command or function by pressing a key.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 27
2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300 FLIR Detection
Operating Key
Status LED
Operating Key
Gamma Alarm LED
Neutron Alarm LED
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 7.
Papercraft model of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with operating elements: Display, LEDs and keys.
28 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
2.1
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Display
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 display (Figure 7 , p.
28 ) is a color LCD screen divided into three principle areas (Figure 8 , p.
29 ):
TOP: Title and Status Bar
This area contains a brief title of the currently performed operation or the current mode the instrument is switched to and some icons representing the status of several components of the instrument.
When a warning or an alarm is raised, the alarm information is shown alternating with the title (see, for example, Figure 100 , p.
98 ).
Title and Status Bar
Main Display Area
Energy Saving Options
GPS Status
Date, Time
Screen Title, Alarm Info
Baery Status
Key Descriptions
Figure 8.
Anatomy of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 display.
The power indicator and the title are grouped in the left part of the bar.
Full battery
Empty or no battery
Triangles symbolize the connection to an external power supply. This information is also shown by a green LED (see 11.2
, p.
230 ).
A segment lickers while the battery is being charged.
The current date and time and indicators for the GPS receiver and the energy saving options are grouped in the right part of the title bar.
19 Feb, 14:10
The current local date and time are shown as day, month, hours (24-hour notation) and minutes.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 29
2.1. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Display FLIR Detection
The time is supplied by the clock built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300. It uses UTC
(a.k.a. “Greenwich Time”) for internal purposes and for time-stamping records saved in the database, for example, spectra or identi ication results.
For correct values you have to ensure the correct setting of the clock and the correct speci ication of your local time zone (see 6.10
, p.
125 ).
The correct time and date can be set using the GPS receiver built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300. If it is switched on (see 6.11
, p.
127 ), it adjusts the clock to the high-precision UTC time received from the GPS satellites. All you have to specify is your local time zone (see 6.10
, p.
125 ).
If the internal clock is completely off, for example after storing the instrument with empty batteries for a couple of weeks, you have to adjust the internal clock and specify the time zone (see 6.10
, p.
125 ).
A one-minute countdown is shown instead of the current clock to announce the beginning of scheduled automated identi ication measurement (see 4.4
, p.
93 ).
A satellite symbolizes the state of the GPS receiver.
GPS receiver is switched off (factory setting, 6.11
, p.
127 ).
GPS receiver is switched on ( 6.11
, p.
127 ) but the GPS reception is not good enough to determine the current position. Invalid coordinates, marked as such, are saved.
GPS receiver is switched on ( 6.11
, p.
127 ) and the GPS reception is suf icient to determine the current position which is saved with measurement data and identi ication results.
A light bulb symbolizes the current energy saving options.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 will not try to save energy because the current operation requires an active display, for example, during an identi ication measurement ( 4.3
, p.
90 ).
The backlight of the screen will be dimmed after the timeout you speci ied ( 6.9
, p.
122 ).
The backlight of the screen will be dimmed after the timeout you speci ied ( 6.9
, p.
122 ) and the application software will power down half a minute later.
This mode is not used while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is powered by an external power source.
You can wake up a sleeping system by pressing a key.
CENTER: Variable Main Display
The contents of this area vary with the current operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
It shows, for example, status information after power up (Figure 55 , p.
63 ), menus to choose commands from (Figure 13 , p.
35 ), the strength of the observed gamma radiation (Figure 87 , p.
86 ), or corresponding alarms (Figure 101 , p.
99 ).
30 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
BOTTOM: Key Descriptions
2.1.1
Status LEDs
Several LEDs (Figure 5 , p.
26 ) indicate various status information.
.
.
Red
labeled “G” (short for “Gamma”) indicates dose and dose rate alarms.
.
.
Blue
labeled “N” (short for “Neutron”) indicates neutron counts and alarms.
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
.
.
Green
indicates the power status (Figure
, p.
Instrument Off
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
...
.
.
.
Running on Battery
Running on Low Battery
External Power
clock
1 s 1 s 1 s 1 s
Figure 9.
Signals of the status LED
1 s 1 s
You can switch off the red and blue LEDs ( 6.32
, p.
160 ).
L
.
R
.
.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 31
2.2. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys FLIR Detection
2.2
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is equipped with three keys (Figure 5 , p.
26 and Figure 7 , p.
28 ).
The single key at the bottom is the power key
I
. It is used to switch the instrument on and off, to cancel edit operations or return to superior menus.
The other two buttons on the
L
left and
R
right side of the instrument are the main operating keys. They change their function according to the current mode of operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
For your convenience, the actual function of these keys in any given situation is displayed in the bottom part of the screen (Figure 7 , p.
28 ). A detailed description of the keys’ functions under various circumstances is given in chapter
, p.
Holding the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with your hand (Figure
33 ), you can, for example, press
one key with your thumb and the other one with your middle inger.
To accomodate to your handedness or your personal preferences (Figure
, p.
and Figure
, p.
34 ), you can swap the function of these keys (
6.9
, p.
122 ).
This document refers to the keys and their functions using the “normal” assigment and label them as
L
and
R
, respectively.
32 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
..
Figure 10.
Right-handed operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with normal key assignments
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 33
2.2. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys FLIR Detection
34
..
Figure 11.
Left-handed operation of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with reverse key key assigments
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
2.2.1
Using Command Lists
Most features of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 offer more commands than you could immediately reach with the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s limited number of keys.
In these cases the special command
Skip is permanently mapped to
L
and you can use it to cycle the available commands. If you reach the end of the list,
L
cycles to the start of the list.
For example, the commands to edit values are
+
,
-
,
Left
,
Right
,
Accept
, and
Cancel
( 2.2.3
, p.
37 ). You can swap these commands with
Skip
(Figure 12 , p.
35 ).
Skip
L
Accept
Cancel
Left
Right
-
+
R
Figure 12.
Skipping commands for value editing
2.2.2
Choosing from Menus
Often you have to choose an operation from a menu like, for example, the “More Options” menu shown in Figure 13 , p.
35 .
Menu Items
Key Descriptions
Figure 13.
Choosing from a menu: Initial state without chosen item
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 35
2.2. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys FLIR Detection
While no item is chosen, you can press
R
to
Exit to the superior screen.
You can choose items from the menu with the command
Down mapped to the
L
key. The chosen item is decorated by a distinct color and symbols (Figure 14 , p.
36 ).
Chosen Item
Figure 14.
Choosing from a menu: Choosing the next item with Down
Press
L
repeatedly to choose other menu items (Figure 15 , p.
36 ).
EXIT
Chosen Item
Figure 15.
Choosing from a menu: Choosing other items with Down
After reaching the bottom of the menu (Figure 15 , p.
36 ), no item will be chosen on the next press of
L
and
Exit becomes available.
Once you have chosen the item you are interested in, you can
Select the item with
R
. This executes the chosen command, which, in our example, opens the Advanced Options menu (Figure 16 , p.
37 ).
36 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Return to Superior Screen
Figure 16.
Choosing from a menu: After executing the command with Select
2.2.2.1 Scrolling in Menus
Some menus offer more options than the ive itting on the screen. This is indicated by scroll bars along the vertical screen edges (Figure 17 , p.
37 ).
A position marker indicates the position of the chosen item relative to the complete list of items.
Arrows at the upper and lower visible item indicate whether more items are available in that direction, respectively.
If you approach the bottom of the screen with
Down mapped to the
L
key, the entire menu is moved up to bring the following items into view. The position markers are adjusted appropriately.
Scroll Bar
More Items Available
Figure 17.
Choosing from a menu: Scrolling in long menus
2.2.3 Changing Values
Many settings of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 require you to choose from a list of options.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 37
2.2. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys FLIR Detection
The operations are illustrated using the Display Settings as an example. Like in a menu ( 2.2.2
, p.
35 ), you choose the setting you want to change with
Down
(Figure 18 , p.
38 ).
Key Descriptions
Figure 18.
Changing Values: Choosing the setting
Once the desired setting is chosen, you
Select it with
R
.
The rendering of the entry ield changes (Figure 19 , p.
38 ): a different color and two arrows indicate there is a list of values you can choose from.
Selected Entry Field
Key Descriptions
Figure 19.
Changing Values: Selected entry ield
Note that the keys now have other functions. You get the next item in the list with
+ mapped to
R
.
Our example is about the display language, so let’s use
R
to change to, for example, Deutsch (German, Figure 20 , p.
39 ).
38 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Changed Value
Go to Next Value
Figure 20.
Changing Values: Changed entry ield
The actual setting did not change yet, the screen is still displayed in English. You can choose other values with
+ ad lib.
To make your changes effective, you need another command which is currently inaccessible. Press
Skip mapped to
L
to make it visible (Figure 21 , p.
39 ).
Changed Value
Figure 21.
Changing Values: Revealing more commands
The moment you press
Accept mapped to
R
, the new setting takes effect. In our case the screen is displayed in German (Figure 22 , p.
40 ).
The keys’ functions return to their previous state.
In case you change your mind, you can
Cancel editing the value with
R
(Reveal the command with
Skip if necessary). The value in effect before you started editing with
Select will be reestablished.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 39
2.2. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys FLIR Detection
Changed Value Accepted
Down, Select
Figure 22.
Changing Values: Changed setting accepted
Pressing
I
for a moment also cancels editing.
Do not press
I
for too long. That would power down your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
2.2.4
Changing Composite Values
Some values are combinations of several components. Calendar dates for example, have year, month, and day components or clock settings have hour and minute components.
Several commands (Figure 12 , p.
35 ) are available if you
Select
(see 2.2.3
, p.
37 ) such values for editing. Always one of the value’s components is selected (Figure 23 , p.
40 ), that is, editing commands are applied to this component.
40
Selected Entry Field
Selected Component
Increase Component
Figure 23.
Changing Combined Values: Changing the selected component
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
You increase the component with
+ and decrease it with
-
. In the example shown here, you edit the year of the date since it is the selected component.
Now you need commands to select the other components of the value (see 2.2.1
, p.
35 ). You can reveal them with
Skip mapped to
L
(Figure 24 , p.
41 ).
Selected Entry Field
Selected Component
Next Component
Figure 24.
Changing Combined Values: Selecting components.
Press
Left or
Right to select the component you want to edit.
To get the commands for editing back, press
Skip until
+ or
reappear.
After you inished editing all components, press
Skip until you see the
Accept command, then press
R
.
In case you change your mind, you can
Cancel editing the value with
R
(Reveal the command with
Skip if necessary). The value in effect before you started editing with
Select will be reestablished.
Pressing
I
for a moment also cancels editing.
Do not press
I
for too long. That would power down your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
2.2.5
Changing Numerical Values
A lot of settings are numerical values, often with a immutable unit.
Several commands (Figure 12 , p.
35 ) are available for editing numerical values. One of the number’s digits is always selected (Figure 25 , p.
42 ), that is, editing commands are applied to this digit. If you start changing a number with
Select
(see 2.2.3
, p.
37 ), the rightmost (least signi icant) digit is selected.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 41
2.2. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys FLIR Detection
Selected Entry Field
Selected Digit
Increase Digit
Figure 25.
Changing Numerical Values: Changing the selected digit
You increase the selected digit with
+ and decrease it with
-
. If you increase the selected digit above 9 or decrease it below 0, the surrounding digits are changed appropriately.
If you want to change the number in larger or smaller increments, you can select another digit to be immediateley affected by the
+ and
commands. Press
Skip until you see the commands
Left or
Right
, and then use them to select the digit you want to change (Figure 26 , p.
42 ).
Selected Entry Field
Selected Digit
Previous Digit
Figure 26.
Changing Numerical Values: Selecting digits
To get the commands for editing back, press
Skip until
+ and
reappear.
After you inished editing the number, press
Skip until you see the
Accept command, then press
R
.
42 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
In case you change your mind, you can
Cancel editing the value with
R
(Reveal the command with
Skip if necessary). The value in effect before you started editing with
Select will be reestablished.
Pressing
I
for a moment also cancels editing.
Do not press
I
for too long. That would power down your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
2.2.6
Entering Text
Several entries consist of arbitrary text, for example the operator’s name, phone numbers, or settings for Bluetooth communication to a remote server (Figure 164 , p.
149 ). Entering and editing text with the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s limited number of keys is, of course, challenging. It is similar to editing composite values as described in 2.2.4
, p.
40 , with every character being a component.
Editing text is a lot more convenient via the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s web interface (see
, p.
Several commands are available if you
Select
(see 2.2.3
, p.
37 ) text values for editing. These commands are mapped to the
R
key. Use
Skip mapped to
L
to cycle through the available commands (see 2.2.1
, p.
35 ).
During text editing, exactly one character is selected (Figure 27 , p.
43 ), that is, editing commands are applied to this character.
Selected Entry Field
Selected Character
Select Next Character
Figure 27.
Editing Text: First character “J” is selected.
To select another character, use
Left or
Right
(Figure 28 , p.
44 ).
If you reach the left end of the text,
Left does nothing. At the end of the text, however,
Right moves to two additional characters (spaces) to facilitate appending another word to the text.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 43
2.2. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys FLIR Detection
Selected Entry Field
Selected Character
Select Next Character
Figure 28.
Editing Text: Next character to the right is selected (“o”).
For the selected character (Figure 30 , p.
44 ), you can use the commands
+ and
to cycle through the available characters in the sequence shown in Figure 29 , p.
44 .
Use the web interface (see
, p.
) to enter international characters like æ, î, ö, ñ, ß, ëtç.
!”§$%&/()[]{}=?*+#’-_@.:,;
0123456789
(Space)
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Figure 29.
Editing Text: Set of available characters
Selected Entry Field
Selected Character
Figure 30.
Editing Text: After changing the selected “o” to an “a”.
To delete the selected character use
Delete
(Figure 31 , p.
45 ).
Change Selected
Character
44 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Selected Entry Field
Selected Character
Delete Selected
Character
Figure 31.
Editing Text: About to delete the selected character “h”.
The characters from the selected one to the end of the text will be moved towards the beginning to ill the gap (Figure 32 , p.
45 ).
Selected Entry Field
Selected Character
Figure 32.
Editing Text: After deleting a character, the next character is selected.
To insert a character before the currently selected character, use
Insert
. The existing characters, including the selected one, are pushed one position towards the end of the text (Figure 33 , p.
46 ).
After you inished editing the text, press
Skip until you see the
Accept command and press
R
(Figure 34 , p.
46 ).
Spaces at the start or end of the text, if any, are removed from your entry.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 45
2.2. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys FLIR Detection
Selected Entry Field
Selected Character
Insert Character
Figure 33.
Editing Text: After inserting space before “ Doe” for an additional character.
Figure 34.
Editing Text: Done.
In case you change your mind, you can
Cancel editing the value with
R
(Reveal the command with
Skip if necessary). The value in effect before you started editing with
Select will be reestablished.
Pressing
I
for a moment also cancels editing.
Do not press
I
for too long. That would power down your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
2.2.7
Entering the Password
If your FLIR identiFINDER R300 is protected by a password, you will have to enter it before you can access most of the options and settings menus of the instrument (Figure 35 , p.
47 ).
If your variant comes with a factory-set password, it is
LMRLMRL
.
46 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Figure 35.
Entering a password to access the option menus.
For better protection against unwanted changes of the instrument characteristics, you should
change the password to something else ( 6.12
).
If you don’t need protection but want faster access to the menus, you can remove the password
( 6.13
, p.
129 ).
Settings and Commands
Skip
Cycle the list of commands (see 2.2.1
, p.
35 ).
L , M , R
Enter the password by seven presses in the correct sequence.
To cancel the password entry press
I
for a moment.
After the seventh entry, the key labels change (Figure 36 , p.
48 ).
Accept
Con irm your password entry and have the instrument check your entry for correctness.
After you entered the correct password, you don’t have to enter it again until you switch off the instrument.
If you enter a wrong password, you will be informed (Figure 37 , p.
48 ). After you con irm the message with
OK
, the instrument will return to the mode it was in before asking for the password.
Cancel
Cancel the password entry and return without proceeding to the protected options and commands.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 47
2.2. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Keys FLIR Detection
Figure 36.
Password entered but not yet con irmed.
48
Figure 37.
Message after entering a wrong password.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
2.2.8
Taking Screenshots
You can save the contents of the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s display at any time.
Ô
To take a screenshot…
1. Press and hold
I
.
2. Press
L
.
You have to press
L
, even if you swapped the assignment of the operating keys ( 6.9
, p.
122 ).
Do not wait too long between pressing
I
and
L
, otherwise you might initiate the power down command ( 2.6
, p.
64 ).
Screenshots are saved in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s permanent memory as image iles named after the screen taken suf ixed by the current date, time and time zone offset.
To access the saved screenshots, connect your FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a computer ( 8.14
, p.
207 ).
You can check the number of saved screenshots in the status display ( 6.14
, p.
130 , Figure 38 , p.
49 ) or erase them (
, p.
Figure 38.
Status display showing the number of saved screenshots.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 49
2.3. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Holster FLIR Detection
2.3
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Holster
For general monitoring of the environment for gamma or neutron radiation, you can insert the FLIR identiFINDER R300 into its holster (Figure
) and wear it on your belt (Figure
, p.
can still hear and feel the alarms and watch the alarm LEDs.
..
Figure 39.
Inserting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 into a holster so alarm LEDs remain visible
50
..
Figure 40.
FLIR identiFINDER R300 in a belt holster with visible alarm LEDs
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
2.4
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
To access the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s web interface, simply point your web browser to one of the addresses given after a connection between your computer and the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is established (see 7.4
, p.
178 ).
Provided a network connection can be established, you can use any modern browser running on, for example, a desktop or laptop PC, a netbook, a tablet, or a smart phone. The browser must support
• HTML 5
• CSS 3
• Javascript
• Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)
The following examples were successfully tested:
• Apple Safari 5 (Microsoft Windows, Mac OS X)
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 (Microsoft Windows)
• Mozilla Firefox 20 (Linux, Microsoft Windows, Mac OS X)
• Opera 10.6 (Microsoft Windows)
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 web access needs no cookies. If cookies are allowed, they are used to remember your settings, for example the number of items you prefer in listings.
2.4.1 Operating the Web Server Pages
The web pages of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 are available in slightly different layouts for different screen or window widths. A narrow version (Figure 41 , p.
52 ) is used on mobile devices like smart phones or tablet computers. The wider version (Figure 42 , p.
53 ) is used on desktop or laptop computers.
The instrument serving these web pages is identi ied in the page header, which also contains the menus and several status indicators.
If you print a web page, the page header is suppressed.
The title of the current web page is shown in the main area below the page header. The content of most web pages is divided into sections of related items.
A tool tip giving details about elements of web pages is shown if you hover and stay with the pointer above an element. (Not available on touch-driven devices without pointer.)
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 51
2.4. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Serial
Number
Menu Buon Baery Status
GPS Status
FLIR Detection
Web Page
Sections
Main Page
Area
Software
Version
Figure 41.
Anatomy of a FLIR identiFINDER R300 web page, narrow layout
The bottom of the pages is marked by the page footer. Especially on systems without visible scrollbars (most mobile phones and tablet computers), this footer indicates that you have seen all of the page.
Apart from the width, the main difference between the narrow and wide layouts of web pages is the menu in the page header. The wide layout uses the space to show the top level of the menu in a bar (Figure 42 , p.
53 ), the narrow layout (Figure 41 , p.
52 ) shows a button. If you click a menu in either layout the menu hierarchy below that item is revealed and you can navigate to the desired web page (Figure 43 , p.
53 , Figure
, p.
).
52 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection
Serial
Number
Menu
Chosen Menu
2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
GPS Status
Baery Status
Web Page
Sections
Software
Version
Figure 42.
Anatomy of a FLIR identiFINDER R300 web page, wide layout
Main Page
Area
Figure 43.
Visible menu hierarchy on a web page with narrow layout
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 53
2.4. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server FLIR Detection
..
Figure 44.
Single submenu on a web page with wide layout
54 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
2.4.2
Tables on Web Pages
Some web pages (e.g., Figure 45 , p.
55 ) show tables of stored records available for download from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer.
Navigation
Column Titles with
Sorting Buons
Seings
Figure 45.
Anatomy of a web page with a data table
You can set the maximum number of table rows shown per web page.
The current page length is remembered on your computer if cookies are allowed.
Depending on your page length setting and the total number of table entries, a table might be split across multiple pages which you can navigate using the buttons above the table.
x/y
Previous
Proceed to the previous page of records.
Number of the current page and number of total pages
Next
Proceed to the next page of records.
You can have the table sorted by columns. The current sorting status is indicated by an icon in the column title. Click one of the icons to change table sorting.
Table is not sorted by this column.
Table is sorted ascending by this column.
Table is sorted descending by this column.
The current sorting is remembered on your computer if cookies are allowed.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 55
2.4. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server FLIR Detection
You can view details about a record listed in the table.
Show
Opens a window or browser tab showing details of the record for further inspection or analysis (see 2.4.3
, p.
56 ).
2.4.3
Records on Web Pages
These pages show the results of a single measurement stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database, for example, an identi ication measurement (Figure 46 , p.
57 ). The main contents vary with the type of shown records. Several buttons are available for navigation and housekeeping.
Previous
Proceed to the previous record of the same type.
Back
Return to the table of records of the same type.
Next
Proceed to the next record of the same type.
Spectrum
If the record contains a spectrum, you can hover above the chart to get details of the pointed part shown. (Not available on touch-driven devices without pointer.)
GPS Coordinates
If GPS coordinates were stored with a record, they are shown in an additional section of the details page (Figure 47 , p.
58 ).
Look Up with GeoHack
Send the GPS coordinates stored with the record to the GeoHack page on the Wikimedia
Toolserver, a free service of Wikimedia Deutschland e.V. (Internet access required).
The service links to international servers of maps, satellite images, aerial photographs etc. which cover the coordinates saved with your record.
Download
Download the shown record to the computer.
The name of the downloaded
*.zip
archive begins with the serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 followed by the type and the reference number of the record, for example
103156000000 Identification 4711.zip
Send
Send the record to the con igured (see 6.24
, p.
149 and
9 , p.
219 ).
56 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection
Record
2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Navigation
Buons
Figure 46.
Anatomy of a web page with details of a record
Your computer must be connected to the Internet for this operation.
The transmission starts immediately and you will be kept posted about the progress (Figure 48 , p.
58 ).
You will be informed after the transmission inished (Figure 49 , p.
59 ) or about transmission errors, if any.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 57
2.4. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server FLIR Detection
Figure 47.
Web page section with GPS coordinates
Figure 48.
Steps of the transmission of data to a reachback server
Delete
Delete the shown record from the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database.
Records referred to by another record, for example a spectrum referred to by an identi ication measurement, are not actually deleted but marked as unreachable for future direct accesses.
58 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Figure 49.
Successful transmission of data to a reachback server
2.4.4
Printing Web Pages
You can print web pages with the usual printing procedures of your web browser.
Some of the shown elements are suppressed when printing web pages, for example the navigation menus or push buttons (Figure 50 , p.
60 ).
Many web browsers suppress printing of background images and colors. For better printing results we recommend to tick the appropriate boxes. Look for settings like
4
Print Background Colors
4
Print Background Images
4
Print Background Images and Colors
2.4.5
Password Entry
An optional ( 6.13
, p.
129 ) password may protect against unauthorized or accidental access to advanced settings and commands of your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
128 ), you have to enter it in the instrument (see
2.2.7
, p.
46 ) or in the web interface (Figure
) to gain access.
When entering the FLIR identiFINDER R300 password via the web interface type “L”, “M”, or
“R” (upper case).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 59
2.4. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server FLIR Detection
Figure 50.
Example printout of measurement results
After entering the correct password, access is granted until you switch off your FLIR identiFINDER R300 ( 2.6
, p.
64 ).
2.4.6
Administration Access
Special credentials are required to access the administration pages of the web server where you can access system iles or upload new software.
The credentials set at the factory are
Username
Password
admin admin
60 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
..
Figure 51.
Entering the password before accessing protected web pages
We recommend to change the password for better protection of your instrument against unauthorized access (see
).
..
Figure 52.
Entering the administration password
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 61
2.5. Starting Up the FLIR identiFINDER R300 FLIR Detection
2.5
Starting Up the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Ô
To start up the FLIR identiFINDER R300…
1. Ensure that the instrument is clean and free of visible damages.
2. Ensure that the battery is charged or connect the instrument to an external power source
(see 11.2
, p.
230 )
3. Press and hold
I
for a moment.
The red LED lashes.
If your variant is equipped with a neutron detector, the blue LED lashes as well.
4. Release the key.
Wait a moment while the FLIR identiFINDER R300
• Identi ies itself (Figure 53 , p.
62 ),
62
Figure 53.
Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300: Product identi ication
• goes through start-up procedures (Figure 54 , p.
63 ),
• initializes the software (Figure 55 , p.
63 ).
If the time of the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s internal clock is unreasonable, most probably caused by the battery being empty for some weeks, you will be asked to set the clock
(see 6.10
, p.
125 ).
5. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 switches to the dose rate display (Figure 56 , p.
63 ) and is ready for operation.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Figure 54.
Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300: Starting up
Figure 55.
Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300: Initialization
Figure 56.
FLIR identiFINDER R300 after powering up.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 63
2.6. Shutting Down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 FLIR Detection
2.6
Shutting Down the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Several methods are available to shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Ô
To shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 normally…
1. Press and hold
I
.
After a couple of seconds, the shut down screen will be displayed (Figure 57 , p.
64 ).
64
Figure 57.
Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300
2. Press
L
to con irm the shut down command.
or
Keep
I
depressed and the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will shut down.
or
Press
R
to cancel the shut down and resume normal operation.
If you shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 while an alarm is raised (Figure 58 , p.
65 ), the end time of the alarm entry is not stored in the database (
). Instead, the end time will re lect that the instrument was shut down before the end of the alarm.
Ô
To shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 in case of software failure…
1. Press and hold
I
for about 20 seconds until the red LED and the beeper emit six short and one long signal.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 should shut down.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Figure 58.
Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300 during an alarm
2.7
Low Power Conditions
When the battery runs out of power, an appropriate warning will be displayed (Figure 59 , p.
65 ) accompanied by a characteristic sound (Figure 60 , p.
65 ). The green status LED lashes with a higher frequency (Figure
).
Figure 59.
Battery almost empty.
Low Battery
Empty Battery
30 s
30 s 15 s 10 s
Figure 60.
Schematic timing of triple beeps indicating low power conditions.
You can
Shut Down with
R
or
Continue using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 with
L
until the battery is completely empty, however, the only remaining operation is the dose rate mode (Figure 61 , p.
66 and 4.1
, p.
86 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 65
2.8. Resetting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 FLIR Detection
Figure 61.
Low Power Dose Rate Mode
If the battery is completely empty, another message (Figure 62 , p.
66 ) will appear accompanied by a characteristic sound (Figure 60 , p.
65 ).
Figure 62.
Battery is empty.
You should switch off the instrument.
Please connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to an external power source (see 11.1
, p.
229 ).
2.8
Resetting the FLIR identiFINDER R300
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can be reset by performing a normal shut down–start up cycle.
All your custom settings remain unchanged by this procedure. To revert the instrument to the factory defaults, use
Reset Factory Settings
( 6.15
, p.
132 ).
66 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 2. Operating the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Ô
To reset the FLIR identiFINDER R300…
1. Shut down the instrument ( 2.6
, p.
64 )
Should a reset be necessary because the instrument does not react to your input anymore, you might have to use the forced shut down procedure described in section 2.6
, p.
64 .
2. Start up the instrument ( 2.5
, p.
62 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 67
FLIR Detection 3. Field Operating Guide
Chapter 3
Field Operating Guide
This chapter provides a guide to the basic operating procedures necessary to survey an object and generate the analyzed results for the survey of that object.
In many cases, your organization or institution will have its own Standard Operating Procedure (SOP). In such a case, you should refer to that SOP.
A typical application of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is the survey of objects for radioactive radiation and to document the results of the survey. This process involves these fundamental steps:
1. Turn on and check the instrument (see 3.1
, p.
70 ).
2. Observe the dose rate in your environment to detect gamma radiation (see 3.2
, p.
70 ).
3. Locate the source of the radiation (see 3.3
, p.
73 ).
4. Identify the nuclides that gamma radiation is originating from (see 3.4
, p.
75 ).
5. Transfer the results to a local computer for further processing (see 3.5
, p.
77 ).
6. Send the results to a remote service (see 3.6
, p.
81 ).
7. Turn off the instrument (see 3.7
, p.
84 ).
Please familiarize yourself with the names and positions of the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s parts and the general methods of operation (chapter 2 , p.
27 ) before proceeding with this chapter.
Chapter
, p.
provides information about all operations and describes the operations mentioned here in more detail. More precise pointers into the reference will be provided with the operation steps outlined below.
The instructions outlined in this chapter assume a variant with a neutron detector ( A.1
, p.
237 ) and with factory settings.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 69
3.1. Switching On and Checking the Instrument FLIR Detection
3.1
Switching On and Checking the Instrument
This description assumes normal operation of the instrument. For a detailed description of the startup procedure refer to section 2.5
, p.
62 .
Ô
To start up the FLIR identiFINDER R300…
1. Press and hold
I
for a moment until the screen backlight appears.
2. Release the key.
Wait a moment while the FLIR identiFINDER R300
• identi ies itself,
• goes through start-up procedures,
• initializes the software (Figure 63 , p.
70 ).
Figure 63.
Powering up the FLIR identiFINDER R300: General system status
3. Verify if there is enough energy in the battery and available space in the memory (Figure 63 , p.
70 ).
4. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 switches to the dose rate display (Figure 64 , p.
71 ) and is ready for operation.
3.2
Observing the Environment
The Dose Rate Mode (Figure 64 , p.
71 ) is the basic operation mode of the FLIR identiFINDER R300, please refer to 4.1
, p.
86 for a detailed description.
3.2.1
Gamma Radiation Survey
70 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 3. Field Operating Guide
Alarm Threshold
Logarithmic Scale
Dose Rate Unit
Figure 64.
Dose Rate mode
Ô
To survey for gamma radiation…
1. Move the instrument around (e.g. Figure 65 , p.
72 ) and observe the display (Figure 64 , p.
71 ).
The current dose rate is shown in large digits and as a bar chart.
For best dose rate calculations the source must not be too close to the instrument (Figure 239 , p.
242 ).
You can change the dose rate unit (see 6.31
, p.
159 ) and the alarm thresholds (see 6.33
, p.
161 ).
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 continuously compares the radiation to warning and alarm thresholds (see 6.33
, p.
161 ). Should the radiation exceed one of the thresholds, the instrument raises an alarm which is reported on-screen (Figure 66 , p.
72 ) and optionally by LEDs, beeper, and vibrator
(see
, p.
for details about the beep and vibration patterns).
You can press
L
Mute to silence alarm annunciation by beeper and vibrator.
Press
R
Acknowledge after you took notice of the alarm or warning.
The alarm or warning will be reported in the title bar until the radiation drops below the appropriate threshold (Figure 66 , p.
72 ).
3.2.2 Neutron Radiation Survey
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Ô
To survey for neutrons…
1. Hold the FLIR identiFINDER R300 close to your body so that the neutron detector (Figure 238 , p.
241 ) is close to you (Figure 67 , p.
73 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 71
3.2. Observing the Environment FLIR Detection
Figure 65.
Surveying an object with the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
72
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 66.
Dose rate warning reported on screen
2. Turn around 360° to detect the neutrons regardless of your location relative to the source.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 3. Field Operating Guide
Figure 67.
Optimum posture for neutron detection
For tests involving un-moderated neutron sources, a 30 cm × 30 cm × 15 cm PMMA phantom
(Figure
, p.
) or equivalent must be placed between the source and the detector in the
FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Figure 238 , p.
241 ) in order to provide adequate moderation of fast neutrons and to simulate the ield operation instructions given here.
3.3
Locating a Radiation Source
Once you suspect the presence of a radiation source from observing the environment, you should
use the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s Finder Mode ( 4.2
88 ) to determine the exact location of the
source.
Ô
To locate a radiation source…
1. Move the instrument to a low-radiation position for a background measurement.
2. Press
L
Finder to switch from Dose Rate Mode to Finder Mode.
3. Wait until the FLIR identiFINDER R300 inishes the background measurement (Figure 68 , p.
74 ).
If you are in a hurry, you can
R
Exit the background measurement (not recommended). The instrument will use the most recent background taken after it was switched on.
4. Move the instrument around to ind the radiation source.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 73
3.3. Locating a Radiation Source FLIR Detection
74
Current Count Rate
Measuring Duration
Figure 68.
Finder mode: Initial background measurement
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 averages the count rate for adjustable intervals (see 6.30
, p.
157 ) and will guide you with its display (Figure 69 , p.
74 ) but mainly by emitting sounds indicating the distance to the source. The closer you are to the source, the more “excited” the beeper and the vibrator get.
Listening to the beeper, you can move around to look for the source while watching your step instead of the screen.
Current Count Rate
Count Rate History
Figure 69.
Finder mode: Continuous measurement
Current Neutron Rate
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
You can change the sensitivity of the beeper (see 6.30
, p.
157 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 3. Field Operating Guide
3.4
Identifying a Radiation Source
After you have detected a radiation source by surveying the ambient dose rate ( 3.2
, p.
70 ) or by locating its position ( 3.3
, p.
73 ), you can use the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s Identi ication Mode ( 4.3
, p.
90 ) to ind out the nuclide the radiation is originating from.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can identify and report a number of nuclides by analyzing the radiation spectrum they emit. You can inspect the library of these nuclides in appendix C , p.
259 or, with less detail, in the instrument itself by checking the nuclide visibility under
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Options (p.
)
ä
Nuclide Visibility (p.
Depending on your instrument’s settings, you might have to enter a password to access the list ( 2.2.7
, p.
46 ).
Ô
To identify radionuclides…
1. If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 runs in Dose Rate Mode (Figure 64 , p.
71 ) and Finder Mode is enabled, then press
Finder
. If Finder mode is disabled, then
Identify will be present so proceed to the next step.
2. Press
Identify to switch to Identi ication Mode (Figure 70 , p.
75 ).
Best Range
Schematic Count Rate
Indicator
Dead Time Relative to
Passed Duration
Advice
Figure 70.
Spectrum acquisition in Identi ication Mode
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 begins to acquire a spectrum of the radiation. Normally, there is a preset acquisition duration, but you can change that to a minimum number of counts set at the factory ( 6.4
, p.
116 ).
3. Move the instrument into a good position for optimal data acquisition.
Try to get the current count rate marker into the center of the schematic indicator (Figure 70 , p.
75 ) by getting closer to or away from the source.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 75
3.4. Identifying a Radiation Source FLIR Detection
Best Range
76
Advice
Figure 71.
Finding the position for best measurements
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 assists with advice given on-screen (Figure 71 , p.
76 ).
4. Wait until the preset acquisition duration is over.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 applies the identi ication algorithm to the acquired data and shows the result (Figure 72 , p.
76 ). Additionally, the identi ication results including the spectrum and, if required and available, the GPS coordinates are automatically saved in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database.
Nuclide Usage
(see p.
259 )
Nuclide Severity,
(Innocent, Suspicious, Threatening, see p.
259 )
Reference Number of the Saved Data
Figure 72.
Identi ication results
Nuclides the identi ication algorithm did not recognize or those recognized but having their visibility suppressed (see
) are reported as “Unknown”.
You can specify whether con idence, usage, or severity are shown, see 6.4
, p.
116 .
5. If necessary, you can acquire more spectrum data to improve the identi ication by pressing
Continue
.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 3. Field Operating Guide
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 will acquire more data for the preset extra duration (see 6.4
, p.
116 ).
6. You can inspect the spectrum acquired for the identi ication by pressing
Skip and
Spectrum
(Figure 73 , p.
77 ). Please refer to 6.2
, p.
106 for options and commands for spectrum viewing.
Figure 73.
Spectrum the identi ication is based upon
3.5
Communicate with a Local Computer
You can access the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s settings and stored data from a computer locally connected to the instrument.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 acts as a web server so you need no special software other than your standard web browser. For some computer operating systems, however, you need to install drivers for the connection. Please refer to section
, p.
for details.
Ô
To transfer identi cation results to a local computer…
These instructions assume that your computer is correctly prepared. Consult section
, p.
or your IT administrator for help.
1. Connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer with the included USB cable (refer to section
for details).
After establishing the connection, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will display its IP address.
(Figure 74 , p.
78 )
2. Use your computer’s standard web browser to navigate to the given IP address.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300’s home page opens and displays diverse information regarding your FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Figure 75 , p.
78 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 77
3.5. Communicate with a Local Computer FLIR Detection
Serial Number
Instrument Type
Main Menu
Figure 74.
Valid IP address after a connection was established
78
Figure 75.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300’s home page
3. Open the table with identi ication records stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database
(Figure 76 , p.
79 ) via the menu
Data Identi cations
.
4. To look for the desired data you can click the sorting button in one of the column titles (Figure 76 , p.
79 ).
5. If many records are stored in the database, you might need to turn pages with the multipage table navigation (Figure 76 , p.
79 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 3. Field Operating Guide
Navigation
Column Titles with Sorting
Buons
Figure 76.
Table of identi ication result records
6. To view a summary of a record, hover the pointer over the table row of the record (Figure 76 , p.
79 ). (Not available on touch-driven devices without pointer.)
7. To view a detailed report of a record, click
Show
.
The details will be shown on separate page (Figure
).
8. To print the report, use your browser’s Print command.
9. To download the identi ication record to your computer in the formats speci ied in the settings (
, p.
Download and follow the instructions of your web browser.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 79
3.5. Communicate with a Local Computer FLIR Detection
80
..
Figure 77.
Details of an identi ication result record
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 3. Field Operating Guide
3.6
Sending Results to a Remote Server
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
You can transfer identi ication results or spectra to a remote server for further processing or analysis. An ANSI N42.42 ile (p.
) containing the data is sent from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a cell phone via short range Bluetooth radio and from the phone to the remote server via the Internet.
The connection requires some initial setup on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and on the mobile phone, please refer to section 9 , p.
219 for details.
Ô
To send identi cation result records to a remote server…
These instructions assume that your FLIR identiFINDER R300 and your cell phone are correctly prepared. Consult section 9 , p.
219 or your IT administrator for help.
1. While the identi ication results (for example of section 3.4
, p.
75 , Figure 72 , p.
76 ) are displayed, press
Skip to reveal the command
Send
(Figure 78 , p.
81 ).
Figure 78.
Identi ication results
2. Initiate the data transfer with
Send
.
A summary of the record is shown (Figure 79 , p.
82 ).
3. Start the data transfer with
Send
.
During the transfer of data you will be kept posted about the progress of the transmission steps (Figure 80 , p.
82 ).
If this is the irst time you are sending data since switching on the FLIR identiFINDER R300, you have to pair it with your Bluetooth phone. Please refer to section 6.23.3
, p.
144 for the complete details.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 81
3.6. Sending Results to a Remote Server FLIR Detection
Figure 79.
Identi ication result summary for sending
82
Figure 80.
Data transmission progress
Ô
To pair with a Bluetooth device…
1. Press
Start Search
(Figure 81 , p.
83 ) to have the FLIR identiFINDER R300 search for suitable
Bluetooth devices.
2. Choose the desired Bluetooth device from the list shown (Figure 82 , p.
83 ) with
Down
.
3. To start the pairing with the chosen device, press
Select
. Your device might require additional steps like entering a PIN. Use the PIN shown on your FLIR identiFINDER R300 screen
(Figure 83 , p.
83 ).
4. Your FLIR identiFINDER R300 displays some details about the paired device and is ready to send data.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 3. Field Operating Guide
Figure 81.
Ready to search for Bluetooth devices
Figure 82.
List of suitable Bluetooth devices detected
Figure 83.
Pairing with a Bluetooth device
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 83
3.7. Switching Off FLIR Detection
3.7
Switching Off
After you are done with all your measurements, you should shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
The details on shutting down are given in section 2.6
, p.
64 , the recommended procedure follows:
Ô
To shut down the FLIR identiFINDER R300…
1. Press and hold
I
.
After a couple of seconds, the shut down screen will be displayed (Figure 84 , p.
84 ).
Figure 84.
Shutting down the FLIR identiFINDER R300
2. Press
L
to con irm the shut down command.
Store your FLIR identiFINDER R300 in its case while not in use.
84 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 4. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes
Chapter 4
FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s essential measuring modes for day-to-day procedures.
Dose Rate Mode
Observe the ambient radiation (see 4.1
, p.
86 )
Finder Mode
Locate radiation sources (see
, p.
)
Identi cation Mode
Identify radiating nuclides (see 4.3
, p.
90 )
Automated Mode
Have the unattended instrument identify radiating nuclides at prede ined time intervals (see
4.4
, p.
93 )
Remotely Controlled Spectrum Acquisition
Acquire spectra via the web interface (see
8.16
, p.
209 )
The alarms overriding all other modes and commands are detailed in Chapter
.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 85
4.1. Dose Rate Mode FLIR Detection
Figure 85.
Cycling the manual modes Dose Rate, Finder, and Identi ication
Figure 86.
While Finder mode is disabled, cycling modes will toggle between Dose Rate and Identi ication modes
4.1
Dose Rate Mode
The Dose Rate Mode is the basic operation mode of the FLIR identiFINDER R300. It is activated after starting up the instrument.
Alarm Threshold
Logarithmic Scale
Dose Rate Unit
Figure 87.
Dose Rate mode
86 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 4. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes
For best dose rate calculations the source must not be too close to the instrument (Figure 239 , p.
242 ).
The dose rate display (Figure 87 , p.
86 ) shows two representations of the gamma dose rate:
Analog
A colored horizontal bar along a logarithmic axis ranging from 0.001 µSv/h to 10 Sv/h
(1 Sv = 100 rem) across the upper part of the screen.
A vertical line marks the position of dose rate alarm threshold (see 6.33
, p.
161 for setting the threshold).
If the dose rate rises above the threshold, the color of the bar representing the current dose rate changes.
Digital
Large digits and a dose rate unit in the screen’s center.
The unit is adjusted to the order of magnitude of the dose rate (µSv/h, mSv/h, Sv/h) and re lects your preferences (see 6.31
, p.
159 ).
If your variant is equipped with a neutron detector, the current neutron rate is shown below the gamma dose rate.
If the dose rate rises above the overload threshold (see
), the instrument’s results are unreliable. This condition is displayed on the screen (Figure 88 , p.
87 ).
We strongly recommend that you retreat from environments with radiation that high.
Figure 88.
Detector overload
Move the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a location with lower radiation and then press
Con rm
.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 87
4.2. Finder Mode FLIR Detection
Settings and Commands
Switch to Finder mode (see
Inspect and change options (see
, p.
4.2
Finder Mode
You can use the FLIR identiFINDER R300 in Finder Mode to locate a radiation source. Move the instrument around the vicinity of a suspected source and monitor the display, the red LED, vibrator, and beeper of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 for changes. The vibration, and especially the sound, get more “excited” the closer the instrument is to the source.
Finder mode can be disabled (see 6.30
, p.
157 ).
You can switch off the LED, the vibrator, and the beeper (see 6.32
, p.
160 ).
Immediately after switching to the Finder mode, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 begins a background measurement (Figure 89 , p.
89 ).
For better results, move the FLIR identiFINDER R300 away from suspected radiation sources during the background measurement.
The duration of the background measurement is shown below the chart showing the measurements.
If a background was measured since switching on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and you don’t want to wait until the background is measured (not recommended), you can cancel the background measurement. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 will then use the most recent previous background measurement.
After the background measurement has inished, the Finder mode screen appears (Figure 90 , p.
89 ).
If your variant is equipped with a neutron detector, the current neutron rate is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
The current count rate is averaged for a period you can specify (see 6.30
, p.
157 ). The average of the most recent period is visualized as a wide column along the right edge of the screen.
Narrow columns representing older periods ill the screen’s center from right to left, pushing the oldest periods off the screen’s left edge.
88 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 4. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes
Current Count Rate
Figure 89.
Finder mode: Initial background measurement
Measuring Duration
Current Count Rate
Count Rate History
Current Neutron Rate
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 90.
Finder mode: Continuous measurement
The vertical scaling of the chart is adjusted continuously to make best use of the available screen height. A dashed line above the chart indicates the adjustable (see 6.30
, p.
157 ) threshold for audible feed back. If the count rate rises above this level, you get noti ied by the red LED, the vibrator, and the beeper. The sound frequency is proportional to the count rate, that is, the closer the instrument gets to the source the higher the tone.
You can mute the sound by pressing
I
for a moment. Muting remains in effect until you leave and re-enter the Finder mode and the background measurement is repeated.
Settings and Commands
Dose
Switch to Dose Rate mode (see 4.1
, p.
86 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 89
4.3. Identi cation Mode FLIR Detection
Identify
Switch to Identi ication mode (see 4.3
, p.
90 ).
Options
Inspect and change options (see
, p.
4.3
Identi cation Mode
You can switch the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to Identi ication Mode to perform the actions necessary to identify the nuclides gamma radiation is originating from.
The instrument acquires a gamma spectrum for a duration you can specify ( 6.4
, p.
116 ) and shows the progress and some parameters of the measurement (Figure 91 , p.
90 ).
The spectrum acquired here overwrites the current contents of the spectrum viewer ( 6.2
, p.
106 ). Data acquisition in the spectrum viewer, if any, is stopped.
Best Range
Schematic Count Rate
Indicator
Dead Time Relative to
Passed Duration
Advice
Figure 91.
Identi ication Mode: Progress display during time limited data acquisition
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 achieves better identi ication results if the count rate is within a certain range shown in the center of in the indicator. While the current count rate is outside the desired range, advices are shown so you can shorten (Figure 92 , p.
91 ) or lengthen (Figure 93 , p.
91 ) the distance between the instrument and the radiation source.
If the acquisition is limited not by the time, but the number of counts ( 6.4
, p.
116 ), the display looks slightly different (Figure 94 , p.
92 ).
You should try to move the instrument into a good position although the advice on moving the instrument in a position for best identi ication is not shown in this mode to make room for the number of counts relative to the required minimum.
90 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 4. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes
Best Range
Advice
Figure 92.
Identi ication Mode: Count rate too low for best results
Best Range
Current Count Rate
Advice
Figure 93.
Identi ication Mode: Count rate too high for best results
The acquisition of data stops after the duration or count criterion ( 6.4
, p.
116 ) is met or when you
Exit
. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 applies the identi ication algorithm and saves and displays the result (Figure 95 , p.
92 and Figure 96 , p.
93 ). If nuclides were identi ied, the results are saved. The reference number of the saved record is shown so you can refer to it for further processing.
You can specify whether con idence, usage, or severity are shown, see 6.4
, p.
116 .
Nuclides the identi ication algorithm did not recognize or those recognized but having their visibility suppressed (see
, p.
118 ) are reported as “Unknown”.
Settings and Commands
Dose
Switch to Dose Rate mode (see 4.1
, p.
86 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 91
4.3. Identi cation Mode FLIR Detection
Best Range
Schematic Count Rate
Indicator
Dead Time Relative to
Passed Duration
Current Count Rate
Registered Counts
Figure 94.
Identi ication Mode: Progress display during count limited data acquisition
92
Reference Number of the Saved Record
Figure 95.
Identi ication Mode: Identi ication was not possible.
Start
Start the identi ication measurement.
Skip
Cycle the list of commands (see 2.2.1
, p.
35 ).
Send
Go to
Send Identi cation
(see 6.21
, p.
137 ) avoiding the detour around the normal options menu hierarchy. The current identi ication will be already chosen for sending.
Exit
Return to the previous mode.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 4. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes
Nuclide Usage
Nuclide Severity
Reference Number of the Saved Record
Figure 96.
Identi ication Mode: Identi ied radionuclides
Continue
Acquire more data to improve the identi ication. The acquisition continues for the duration you speci ied (see 6.4
, p.
116 ) no matter whether you limited the duration or the minimum number of counts for the initial acquisition.
Spectrum
Inspect the acquired spectrum.
This command is available only after you entered the password or if the password protection is off.
Please refer to 6.2
, p.
106 for options and commands for spectrum viewing. After you return from the spectrum, you can
Continue to acquire data, or
Exit the identi ication mode.
4.4
Automated Mode
In automated mode, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 collects data for a radionuclide identi ication at speci ied time intervals or in response to a dose rate warning. You can switch this mode on or off and specify the interval (see 6.20
, p.
135 ).
For each measurement, data will be collected until an instrument-speci ic number of gamma counts has been registered (cf. “Dynamic” identi ication duration, see 6.4
, p.
116 ).
In low-radiation environments, this can take quite a while, even longer than the interval you speci ied. The next scheduled measurement will be omitted in such cases.
The start of an automated measurement will be announced 60 s in advance by a countdown shown instead of the current time on the display of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Figure 97 , p.
94 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 93
4.4. Automated Mode FLIR Detection
Countdown
Figure 97.
Countdown announcing the start of a scheduled measurement
Automatic identi ication measurements override other activities except alarms (see
tomatic measurements are blocked during:
• Background measurements in Finder Mode (see
, p.
• A running self test (see
During these conditions, the countdown continues, but “Blocked” is shown instead of the countdown timer. Should the condition end before the scheduled time, the measurement starts. Otherwise, the measurement is omitted and a new attempt is made after the regular interval.
During the measurement, basic radiation data and a small spectrum with logarithmic scaling are shown (Figure 98 , p.
94 ).
94
Progress Bar
Figure 98.
Automated measurement
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 4. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Modes
Settings and Commands
Switch off automated mode.
Depending on your variant, this might require entering the password ( 2.2.7
, p.
46 ).
Cancel this measurement. The next measurement will start as scheduled.
Detected Nuclides
Once the Automated Mode measurement is complete, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will report any nuclide(s) identi ied and indicate the reference number assigned to the stored results.
Initially, the only available command on the nuclide results screen shows a countdown timer starting at 30 s. When the timer expires, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will return to the screen that was active before the Automated Mode measurement started. Pressing prior to the timer expiring will cancel the timer and the command will change to .
Only appears if the results countdown timer was cancelled. Press to close the results screen and return to the screen that was active before the Automated Mode measurement started.
Results Storage
The results of the measurements are saved in the database of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
They are marked as being results of automated measurements (see
).
4.5
Remote-Controlled Spectrum Acquisition
While the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is connected to a computer, you can collect and analyze spectra via the web interface. This method of data acquisition for spectra interrupts other operations of the instrument.
Alarms will still be reported, if necessary.
During the acquisition, a message is shown (Figure 99 , p.
96 ). You can stop it on the instrument with or via the web interface with
.
.
(see 8.16
, p.
209 ).
After the acquisition, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 resumes the mode it was in before. If the previous operation was interrupted during a time limited task like collecting background or identi ication data, it must start over again.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 95
4.5. Remote-Controlled Spectrum Acquisition FLIR Detection
Figure 99.
Message during remote-controlled spectrum acquisition
96 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 5. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Alarms
Chapter 5
FLIR identiFINDER R300 Alarms
If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 detects radiation above certain thresholds you can specify (see 6.33
, p.
161 ), it raises an alarm. Alarms can be reported via several annunciators:
Main Display
Details of the alarm are always displayed on-screen, no matter which other activity was displayed at the time the alarm condition was met (for example, Figure 101 , p.
99 ).
The screen backlight will be switched on if it timed out ( 6.9
, p.
122 ).
The alarm details remain on the screen until you dismiss them.
Status Bar
If you dismiss the alarm details, the alarm and warning information is shown in the status bar along the display’s top edge alternating with the normal information shown there (Figure 100 , p.
98 ).
LED
LEDs (Figure 7 , p.
28 ) lash in several patterns.
Beeper
The beeper emits various sound patterns.
Vibrator
The vibrator shakes the instrument (and adds a little sound).
You can switch the LEDs, the beeper and the vibrator on or off (see 6.32
, p.
160 ).
All alarms are stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database, including date and time (always) and GPS coordinates (if switched on and available, see 6.11
, p.
127 ).
You can review saved alarms via the web interface (
6.17
, p.
133 )
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 97
5.1. Gamma Alarms FLIR Detection
Settings and Commands
Mute
Switch off the beeper and vibrator for the current alarm. The next alarm, if any, reactivates sound and vibration.
Acknowledge
Acknowledge the alarm.
The beeper and the vibrator are switched off (see “Mute” above) and the screen returns to the content displayed before the alarm was raised (Figure 100 , p.
98 ). The alarm details, however, will alternate with the standard information in the title bar until the radiation drops below the alarm threshold.
Figure 100.
Dose rate display with alarm indication
5.1
Gamma Alarms
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 continuously compares the detected gamma radiation against thresholds you can specify for
• dose warning and dose alarm (see 6.33
, p.
161 )
• dose rate warning and dose rate alarm (see
, p.
When a threshold is exceeded, an appropriate warning or alarm is raised and reported visually
(Figure 101 , p.
99 and Figure 102 , p.
99 ). The appropriate behavior of the annunciators is detailed in Figure
98 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 5. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Alarms
Figure 101.
Alarm display: Dose rate warning
Figure 102.
Alarm display: Dose rate alarm
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 99
5.1. Gamma Alarms FLIR Detection
..
..
..
....
..
..
....
..
....
.
.
.
..
.
...
.
.
Warning
Red LED
Beeper
Vibrator
Red LED
Beeper
Vibrator
Dose or Dose Rate Alarm
Dose + Dose Rate Alarm
Red LED
Beeper
Vibrator
clock
1 s 1 s 1 s
Figure 103.
Gamma alarms as announced by the red LED, beeper, and vibrator
100 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 5. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Alarms
5.2
Neutron Alarms
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 continuously compares the number of detected neutrons per given period against thresholds you can specify for warnings and alarms (see 6.35
, p.
163 ).
When a threshold is exceeded, an appropriate warning or alarm is raised and reported visually
(Figure 104 , p.
101 ). The appropriate behavior of the annunciators is detailed in Figure 105 , p.
101 .
Figure 104.
Alarm display: Neutron alarm
Warning
Blue LED
Beeper
Vibrator
Blue LED
Beeper
Vibrator
clock
Alarm
1 s 1 s 1 s
Figure 105.
Neutron incidents as announced by the blue LED, beeper, and vibrator
5.3
Sigma Noti cations
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 continuously monitors the radiation level and uses a smart algorithm to detect unusual increases. These events are announced as “𝜎 noti ication” in the display’s title bar
(Figure 106 , p.
102 ) and, optionally, via beeper and vibrator.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 101
5.3. Sigma Noti cations FLIR Detection
𝜎 noti ications are based on the increase of the radiation level over time. Other than the alarms described above, they do not depend on the absolute level.
Figure 106.
Dose rate display with 𝜎 noti ication 𝜎 noti ications are especially useful while you carry the instrument on your belt because the instrument calls for your attention by beeping and lashing upon the sudden increase of the radiation level.
You can activate the announcements and control the sensitivity (see
6.35
, p.
163 ).
102 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Chapter 6
FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s vast number of settings that in luence its behavior, and the commands for expert analyses and advanced operations.
You can access these commands and settings by navigating the menu hierarchy. Depending on your variant, there are different entry points for the menu hierarchy.
Some FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants provide easy access to a few commands and settings without password. The complete menu listed under
, p.
is available as well.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.10
, p.
125
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.36
, p.
165
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
6.1
Complete Option Menus (Outline)
All FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants provide access to the complete set of commands and settings.
Usually, you have to enter a password (see 2.2.7
, p.
46 ) before access.
⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.2
, p.
106
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.3
, p.
115
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.4
, p.
116
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.6
, p.
119
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.7
, p.
120
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 103
6.1. Complete Option Menus (Outline) FLIR Detection
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.8
, p.
121
©
©
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.23.1
, p.
141
©
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.23.2
, p.
142
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
6.9
6.10
6.11
, p.
, p.
, p.
122
125
127
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.13
, p.
129
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.14
, p.
130
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.15
, p.
132
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.16
, p.
133
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.17
, p.
133
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.20
, p.
135
©
©
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.21
, p.
137
©
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.22
, p.
140
©
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.23.3
, p.
144
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.24
, p.
149
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.26
, p.
152
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.27
, p.
153
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.28
, p.
154
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.29
, p.
155
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.30
, p.
157
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.31
, p.
159
104 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
Legend
Menu (all variants)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Command (all variants)
Menu
© (some variants)
Command
©
(some variants)
Options Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.32
, p.
160
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.33
, p.
161
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
©
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.35
, p.
163
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 6.36
, p.
165
More Options
Gamma, Neutron Counters
Finder Settings
Dose Rate Settings
Spectrum
Identi cation Options
Presets
Bluetooth SPP
©
Advanced Options
Alarm Indicators
Dose Alarm Thresholds
Calibration
Identi cation Settings
Nuclide Visibility
Nuclide Usage
Nuclide Severity
Bluetooth SPP Status
©
General Options
Maintenance
Data Logging
Connectivity Options
Alarm Options
Dose Rate Alarm
Thresholds
Neutron Alarm
Thresholds
©
Current Alarm State
Figure 107.
Hierarchy of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 menu
Bluetooth SPP Settings
©
Display Settings
Clock Settings
GPS Settings
Change Password
Show Status
Reset Factory Settings
Erase Data
Self Test
Automated Mode Settings
Send Data
©
Bluetooth Periphery
©
Remote Server Settings
Mass Storage
Network
Report Settings
Download Settings
Set Password
Clear Password
Erase All Spectra
Erase All Alarms
Erase All Screenshots
Send Identi cation
©
Send Spectrum
©
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 105
6.2. Spectrum FLIR Detection
6.2
Spectrum
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Spectrum
Live Spectrum (p.
209 )
This command displays a spectrum and offers access to the settings that in luence the display. You can acquire data ad hoc or load saved spectra from the database and inspect them with different scalings.
End Coordinate of
Horizontal Axis
Count Axis
Chart Seings
Chart
Channel or Energy Axis
Spectrum Information
Figure 108.
Anatomy of the spectrum display
The largest part of the screen is used for the spectrum chart (Figure 108 , p.
106 ). Various status information is shown around the chart (Figure 109 , p.
107 ).
Acquisition Duration
The time passed while acquiring data for the spectrum as real or live time.
Dead Time
The dead time as a percentage of the real time.
Gamma Count
The total gamma counts comprising the spectrum.
Neutron Count
The total number of neutrons counted while acquiring data for the spectrum.
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Scaling
The current scaling of the vertical axis (linear, logarithmic, square root, …).
Horizontal Coordinates
The coordinates of the leftmost and rightmost values currently shown on the horizontal axis; depending on current zoom state and cursor position.
106 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
End Coordinate of
Horizontal Axis
Scaling of
Vertical Axis
Chart
Acquisition Duration
Gamma Counts
Horizontal Scale
(Zoom)
Neutron Counts
(Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.)
Dead Time
Figure 109.
Spectrum information around the chart
Settings and Commands
Skip
Cycle the list of commands (see 2.2.1
, p.
35 ).
Press
I
to exit to the superior screen.
Start
⇋
Stop
Start or stop the acquisition of data for the spectrum. The current status is shown in the center of the chart (Figure 110 , p.
107 ), which updates live with the acquired data.
Acquisition Status
Real/Live Time Indicator
Acquisition Duration
Figure 110.
Acquiring spectrum data
You cannot start the acquisition if the duration you preset (see 6.8
, p.
121 ) for acquisition has ended. This is indicated by a remaining acquisition duration (Figure 111 , p.
108 ) of
0. If you try to start nevertheless, your FLIR identiFINDER R300 beeps.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 107
6.2. Spectrum FLIR Detection
The current spectrum is not cleared before recording data, that is, new measurements are added to the existing spectrum. To record a pristine spectrum, use the
Clear command irst (see below).
The acquisition of spectrum data stops in one of the following events:
• You end the acquisition with
Stop
.
• The end of the real or life duration you speci ied (see 6.8
, p.
121 ) is reached. You know the duration is preset because of the indicator (Figure 111 , p.
108 ) and the timer is counting down.
Real/Live Time Indicator
Preset Indicator Remaining Acquisition Duration
Acquisition Status
Figure 111.
Acquiring spectrum data while the duration is preset
• You switch the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to Identi ication Mode (see 4.3
, p.
90 ). This discards the current spectrum and loads the spectrum from the identi ication process into the spectrum viewer.
• You
Exit the spectrum view.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
If you try to exit during data acquisition, you will be asked to con irm the command because the acquisition will stop.
Spectrum Cursor
You can place a cursor for detailed inspection along the spectrum’s horizontal axis. The cursor position is represented on screen by a vertical line with a down-pointing triangle on top
(Figure 112 , p.
109 ).
The number of counts at the cursor’s position is shown above the triangle together with the position as channel number (Figure 112 , p.
109 ) or energy (Figure 113 , p.
110 ).
108 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
The vertical scaling is adjusted to make best use of the available screen height. If you zoom in (see below), this may cause vertical rescaling if you move the cursor between sections with high peaks or noise.
End Coordinate of
Horizontal Axis
Scaling of
Vertical Axis
Horizontal Scale
(Zoom)
Figure 112.
Spectrum with cursor at local peak
¶
Cursor Left
Move the cursor to the left. If you pass the left edge, the cursor wraps around to the right edge.
Cursor Right
·
Move the cursor to the right. If you pass the right edge, the cursor wraps around to the left edge.
Region of Interest (ROI)
You can mark a part of a spectrum for closer inspection. The region of interest is de ined by its left and right boundaries which you can set with the cursor (Figure 113 , p.
110 ).
Mark Channel
De ine a boundary of the ROI at the current cursor position. Up to two boundaries are possible.
It does not matter which boundary of the ROI you mark irst.
1. If this is the irst marker you set, it will be decorated with diamonds (Figure 114 , p.
110 ).
2. If this is the second marker you set, both markers will be decorated with triangles pointing into the de ined ROI (Figure 115 , p.
111 ).
3. If you try to set a third marker, the old marker closest to the current position will be removed before setting the new marker.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 109
6.2. Spectrum
Cursor Decoration
Figure 113.
ROI Speci ication: Moving the cursor
Cursor Decoration
FLIR Detection
Figure 114.
ROI Speci ication: Marking the irst ROI boundary
Clear Markers
Clear all markers.
Zoom 3 MeV
⇋
Zoom 1.5 MeV
⇋
Zoom 1:1
⇋
Zoom ROI
Choose a horizontal display scale and range.
Zoom 3 MeV
All the channels (3 MeV range) of the spectrum scaled to it into the available screen width (Figure 116 , p.
111 ). If you move the cursor off-screen, it will re-appear on the other side.
Zoom 1.5 MeV
The irst half of the channels (1.5 MeV range) of the spectrum scaled to it into the available screen width (Figure 117 , p.
112 ). If you move the cursor off-screen, it will re-appear on the other side.
110 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection
Cursor Decoration
Marker Decoration
6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 115.
ROI Speci ication: Marking the second ROI boundary
End Coordinate of
Horizontal Axis
Horizontal Scale
(Zoom)
Figure 116.
Spectrum Scale: Complete spectrum visible
Zoom 1:1
Every spectrum channel is represented by one screen pixel (Figure 118 , p.
112 ). If you move the cursor off-screen, the spectrum scrolls with the cursor. After the cursor reaches the end of the spectrum, it will re-appear on the other side.
Zoom ROI
The spectrum is scaled to it the ROI into the available screen width (Figure 119 , p.
113 ).
If you try to move the cursor off-screen, the scale is changed to ensure the cursor remains visible.
Clear
Clear the current spectrum. You have to con irm this command with
Clear or change your mind with
Cancel
.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 111
6.2. Spectrum FLIR Detection
End Coordinate of
Horizontal Axis
Horizontal Scale
(Zoom)
Figure 117.
Spectrum Scale: First half of spectrum visible
End Coordinate of
Horizontal Axis
Horizontal Scale
(Zoom)
Figure 118.
Spectrum Scale: One display pixel equals the width of one spectral channel
This command clears the current spectrum but does not stop the current acquisition of data, if any.
Save
Save the current spectrum. The reference number of the saved spectrum will be shown until you acknowledge it.
If there is not enough free memory to store the spectrum, you will be informed. You can delete saved spectra (see 6.16
, p.
133 ) if necessary.
Load
Load a saved spectrum.
You can choose from all the saved spectra. While you step through the list, the saving date of the spectrum is displayed (Figure 120 , p.
113 ) to assist you with making a selection.
112 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
End Coordinate of
Horizontal Axis
Horizontal Scale
(Zoom)
Figure 119.
Spectrum Scale: The de ined ROI its into the available screen width
Figure 120.
Choosing a saved spectrum to be loaded for display
To cancel loading a spectrum, press
I
.
If you load a spectrum while acquiring data, the current spectrum is discarded but the acquisition is not stopped. That is, fresh data are added to the loaded spectrum.
Identify
Let the FLIR identiFINDER R300 apply its identi ication algorithm to the current spectrum.
A list of identi ied nuclides, if any, is displayed and saved (Figure 121 , p.
114 ).
Nuclides the identi ication algorithm did not recognize or those recognized but having their visibility suppressed (see
) are reported as “Unknown”.
You can specify whether con idence, usage, or severity are shown, see 6.4
, p.
116 .
Exit
Return to the spectrum display.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 113
6.2. Spectrum FLIR Detection
Nuclide Usage
Nuclide Severity
Reference Number of the Saved Record
Figure 121.
Radionuclides identi ied in the current spectrum
Send
Go to
Send Identi cation
(see 6.21
, p.
137 ), avoiding the detour around the normal options menu hierarchy. The current identi ication will be already chosen for sending.
Logarithmic
⇋
Linear
⇋
Square Root
⇋
Ymax/2
⇋
Ymax/4
Cycle the methods for the vertical scaling. The current method is indicated in the status bar right of the chart (Figure 112 , p.
109 ). The method you get after pressing the key is shown in the key description.
For logarithmic, linear, and square root scaling the maximum peak is rendered so it makes best use of the available screen height.
The other scalings stretch the rendering so that only the given bottom fraction of the spectrum is visible. Higher peaks are cut off.
Energy
⇋
Channel
Cycle the options for the display of horizontal coordinates in the spectrum. The current unit and range is shown above the chart (Figure 112 , p.
109 and Figure 110 , p.
107 ). The variant you get after pressing the key is shown in the key description.
Calibration
View a detail spectrum to check the calibration. Please refer to 6.3
, p.
115 for details.
LT
⇋
RT
Specify the type of display for the duration of data acquisition.
You can specify real or live time display. The current setting is shown below the chart (Figure 110 , p.
107 ).
No matter what you specify here, the dead time (DT) is always shown as a percentage of the real time.
114 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Send
Save the spectrum and go to
Send Spectrum
(see 6.22
, p.
140 ), avoiding the detour around the normal options menu hierarchy. The current spectrum will be already chosen for sending.
Preset
Go to the
Presets
(see 6.8
, p.
121 ), avoiding the detour around the normal options menu hierarchy.
6.3
Calibration
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Spectrum (p.
106 )
ä
Calibration
The calibration check screen (Figure 122 , p.
116 ) shows a zoomed spectrum (see 6.2
, p.
106 ) of a certain peak and some parameters describing the peak. The center of the horizontal axis is positioned at the theoretical peak position and the vertical axis is scaled logarithmically.
Upon entering this screen, a peak of
137
Cs is shown. You can choose other nuclides from a list of nuclides commonly used for calibration (Table 1 , p.
115 ).
Table 1.
Typical Calibration Peaks
Nuclide Peak [keV]
137
Cs 661.65
40
K
232
Th
1460.8
2615
22
Na (ANNH) 511 Annihilation radiation also originates from other sources like
11
C,
13
N,
15
O,
18
F,
68
Ga, or
82
Rb.
54
Mn
60
Co
241
Am
238
U (DU)
235
U (HEU)
834.838
1173
59.54
1001
185.7
Refer to Appendix C , p.
259 for details about the nuclides.
Make sure the source selected to be checked is present when using this command.
For best results, move the instrument to a low-radiation environment to check the calibration.
Data for this spectrum are continuously acquired beginning with an empty spectrum upon entering this screen or after you cleared the data (see below).
Settings and Commands
Nuclide
The nuclide used for the calibration check, refer to Table 1 , p.
115 .
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 115
6.4. Identi cation Settings FLIR Detection
Figure 122.
Checking the calibration
Peak Position
The position of the measured peak (keV).
Uncertainty
The statistical uncertainty of the peak. This value decreases with an increasing number of counts, you can expect reliable results for values below 0.5 %.
Do not trust the igures alone, watch the spectrum chart to verify the existence of a peak.
Deviation
The measured peak’s position deviation from the theoretical position.
Peak FWHM
The full width at half maximum height of the measured peak.
K-40
⇋
Th-232
⇋
Na-22
⇋
Mn-54
⇋
Co-60
⇋
Am-241
⇋
DU
⇋
U-235
⇋
Cs-137
Cycle through the nuclides available for calibration check. The command description names the nuclide you get after executing the command, the current nuclide is shown next to the spectrum chart.
Clear
Clear the acquired data. The acquisition of data is not interrupted.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.4
Identi cation Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Settings
Settings (p.
ä
General (p.
184 )
ä
Identi cation (p.
184 )
116 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
This screen (Figure 123 , p.
117 ) groups options that in luence the identi ication of nuclides (see
4.3
, p.
90 ).
Figure 123.
Upper items of the identi ication settings
Settings and Commands
Duration
Specify the duration of data acquisition for the nuclide identi ication. Allot more time to the identi ication measurement if:
• you want to identify a weak source.
• you are at a place with high background radiation.
• you want to identify a mixture of radionuclides.
• you want to identify a shielded source.
You can specify the durations “Dynamic” or from 1 s to 999 s (16 m 39 s).
If you specify a duration of “Dynamic”, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will collect data until 4800 gamma counts have been registered. This may take a while especially if the radiation level is near the background level.
Extra Duration
Specify the duration of continued data acquisition for the nuclide identi ication. This duration is applied when you use the
Continue command in identi ication mode (see 4.3
, p.
90 ), no matter whether you speci ied the duration or the minimum number of counts above.
You can specify an extra duration from 1 s to 999 s (16 m 39 s).
Con dence
Specify if you want the level of con idence of a nuclide identi ication shown or hidden in identi ication results. The con idence is expressed on a scale from 0 (poor) to 10 (excellent).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 117
6.5. Nuclide Visibility FLIR Detection
Specify if you want the usage of an identi ied nuclide shown or hidden in identi ication results
(for details refer to 6.6
, p.
119 or C , p.
259 ).
Specify if you want the severity of an identi ied nuclide shown by icons or hidden in identi ication results (for details refer to 6.7
, p.
120 or C , p.
259 ).
I
.
.
Innocent
S
T
..
.
.
Suspicious
Threatening
+
.
.
,
Specify whether all uranium isotopes and all plutonium isotopes, respectively, should be identi ied together as element (uranium) or separately as nuclides (
235
U,
238
U, etc.).
.
.
,
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
.
.
,
.
,
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Return to the superior menu.
6.5
Nuclide Visibility
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Options (p.
)
ä
Nuclide Visibility
Settings (p.
ä
Nuclides (p.
Built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is a library used to identify the nuclides causing gamma radiation. Please refer to Appendix C , p.
259 for further information about the nuclides in this library.
You can specify which nuclides should be included in the display of identi ication results (Figure 124 , p.
119 ).
Settings and Commands
Choose one from the list of nuclides to specify whether you want it to be shown or suppressed in identi ication results.
Suppressed nuclides are reported as “Unknown” if recognized by the identi ication algorithm.
Cycle the list of commands (see 2.2.1
, p.
35 ).
118 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 124.
Top of the nuclide list used by the identi ication algorithm
Down , Up , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.6
Nuclide Usage
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Options (p.
)
ä
Nuclide Usage
Settings (p.
ä
Nuclides (p.
Built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is a library used to identify the nuclides causing gamma radiation. Please refer to Appendix C , p.
259 for further information about the nuclides in this library.
Every nuclide has associated information about its occurrence or ield of application which you can have shown in identi ication results (Figure 96 , p.
93 ). You can adapt the usage for all the nuclides in the library according to your needs with this command (Figure 125 , p.
120 ).
Settings and Commands
Nuclides…
Choose one from the list of nuclides to edit the associated usage (see C , p.
259 ).
Skip
Cycle the list of commands (see 2.2.1
, p.
35 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 119
6.7. Nuclide Severity FLIR Detection
Figure 125.
Usage information in the nuclide list used by the identi ication algorithm
Down , Up , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.7
Nuclide Severity
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Options (p.
)
ä
Nuclide Severity
Settings (p.
ä
Nuclides (p.
Built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is a library used to identify the nuclides causing gamma radiation. Please refer to Appendix C , p.
259 for further information about the nuclides in this library.
Every nuclide has associated information about its potential danger which you can have shown in identi ication results (Figure 96 , p.
93 ). You can adapt the severity for the nuclides in the library according to your needs with this command (Figure 126 , p.
121 ).
The severity of some nuclides is ixed. This is indicated by a small padlock symbol.
Settings and Commands
Nuclides…
Choose one from the list of nuclides to edit the associated severity.
I
Innocent
120 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Locked Seing
Figure 126.
Severity information in the nuclide list used by the identi ication algorithm
S
T
Suspicious
Threatening
Skip
Cycle the list of commands (see 2.2.1
, p.
35 ).
Down , Up , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.8
Presets
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Presets
This screen (Figure 127 , p.
122 ) groups options that in luence the data acquisition for spectra ( 6.2
, p.
106 ).
You can stop the data acquisition for spectra manually or have it stop automatically after a duration or a number of counts you specify here.
You can preset either one of these limits. If you try to enter a second preset, the others will be set to “No Limit”.
Preset limits remain in effect until you change them or switch off your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 121
6.9. Display Settings FLIR Detection
Figure 127.
Preset times for spectrum data acquisition
Settings and Commands
Real Time
Specify the duration of data acquisition as real time. You can specify durations up to 43200 s
(12 h) or “No Limit”.
Live Time
Specify the duration of data acquisition as live time. You can specify durations up to 43200 s
(12 h) or “No Limit”.
Counts
Specify the number of counts to be acquired. You can specify values from 100 to 9 999 900 in steps of 100 or “No Limit”.
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.9
Display Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
General Options (p.
)
ä
Display Settings
Settings (p.
ä
General (p.
184 )
ä
User Interface (p.
)
This screen groups several options that in luence the display of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Figure 128 , p.
123 ).
122 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 128.
Display settings in daytime colors
Settings and Commands
Colors
Choose a color set for the display.
Daytime
Colors optimized for bright environments (Figure 128 , p.
123 ). Almost all screen shots in this manual were taken using this color set.
Nighttime
Colors optimized for dazzle-free reading in dark environments (Figure 129 , p.
123 ).
Figure 129.
Display settings in nighttime colors
Classic
Colors mimicking the monochrome appearance of outdated instruments (Figure 130 , p.
124 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 123
6.9. Display Settings FLIR Detection
124
Figure 130.
Display settings in classic colors
Backlight
Specify the brightness of the display’s backlight in steps between 1 (dim) and 10 (very bright).
Timeout
Specify the duration of user inactivity after which the display backlight is dimmed to save energy. You can choose from 15 s – 60 s – 5 min – Never.
The backlight draws a signi icant amount of power, you should let it time out while running on batteries.
After the backlight times out, you can reactivate it by brie ly pressing any key. At this moment, the usual functions of short key presses are ignored.
Language
Choose a language to be used for the display.
English
English with American spelling
Deutsch
German
…
more languages…
Ensure you understand enough of the language you are changing to. It may be dif icult to change back if you do not understand the menu language.
Key Functions
Choose a mapping of commands to keys to accommodate your personal preferences (Figures
, p.
The actual function of the keys is always displayed on-screen.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Normal
Commands are mapped to the
L
and
R
keys as shown in this manual.
Swapped
Commands mapped to the
L
and
R
keys are exchanged.
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.10 Clock Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
General Options (p.
)
ä
Clock Settings
Settings (p.
ä
GPS and Clock (p.
)
ä
Clock (p.
You can check and change the settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s clock in this screen (Figure 131 , p.
125 ).
If the GPS receiver is switched on (see 6.11
, p.
127 ), the received time sets the clock of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and the only setting you have to specify is your time zone.
If the clock setting seems unreasonable when switching on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (see
2.5
, p.
62 ), for example after the batteries were completely empty for a while, this screen will show up and you will be asked to enter the correct date, time, and time zone settings.
GPS Status
Editable Only While
GPS is Off
Figure 131.
Setting date and time while GPS clock is not available.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 125
6.10. Clock Settings FLIR Detection
If GPS date and time information become available while you edit the date or time, editing will be cancelled and the GPS clock is used.
Settings and Commands
Time Zone
Select your time zone from the list built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300. Time zones are speci ied as offset from UTC/GMT (Figures 132 – 133 , p.
126 – 126 ).
Periods for daylight savings time, however, might be different for the same offset from UTC in various regions. To have the FLIR identiFINDER R300 consider the correct daylight savings time for your time zone, make sure to check the region info when selecting the offset.
GPS Status
Time Zone Offset
GPS Clock is Used to
Set Date and Time
Time Zone Region
Figure 132.
Clock Settings: Selecting the time zone
GPS Status
Time Zone Offset
GPS Clock is Used to
Set Date and Time
Time Zone Region
Figure 133.
Clock Settings: Selecting the time zone
126 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Date
Specify year, month and day of the current date.
Time
Specify hours and minutes of the current time.
The time is speci ied in 24-hour format (ISO 8601).
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Left , Right
Edit composite values, see 2.2.4
, p.
40 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.11
GPS Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
General Options (p.
)
ä
GPS Settings
Settings (p.
ä
GPS and Clock (p.
)
ä
GPS (p.
)
This screen (Figure 134 , p.
127 ) groups settings regarding the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s GPS receiver.
Figure 134.
GPS Settings
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 127
6.12. Set Password FLIR Detection
Settings and Commands
Switch the GPS receiver On or Off (factory default).
The GPS receiver draws a signi icant amount of power, you should switch it off if you don’t need it, especially while running on batteries.
If the GPS receiver is on and the reception is good enough, the GPS coordinates of the current location are stored with alarms, spectra, identi ication results etc.
If the GPS reception is not good enough, for example inside buildings, the current location cannot be determined. If a location could be determined from GPS data since you switched on the FLIR identiFINDER R300, the last valid location is used. Otherwise, the position of the intersection of the Greenwich Meridian with the Equator is used (0° N, 0° E).
Additionally, the clock of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is set according to the high-precision time received from the GPS satellites (see 6.10
, p.
125 ).
+
.
.
,
.
.
,
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
.
.
,
.
,
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Return to the superior menu.
6.12
Set Password
Options Menu (p.
)
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
)
ä
Maintenance (p.
)
ä
Change Password (p.
ä
Set
Password
The password set at the factory, if any, is
LMRLMRL
. For better protection against unwanted changes of the instrument characteristics, you should change the password to something else. If you don’t need protection but want faster access to the menus, you can remove the password ( 6.13
, p.
129 ).
Make sure to remember the password you set. There is no way to access the protected options and commands without it. A password cannot be deciphered at the factory.
This command lets you enter a new password (Figure 135 , p.
129 ) consisting of seven characters from the pool
L M R
.
To cancel the entry of the password press
.
.
I
.
After your entry is complete (Figure 136 , p.
129 ), you can activate the password with the password modi ication.
or
128 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 135.
Entering a new password
Figure 136.
Entering a new password: Con irmation
6.13
Clear Password
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
ä
Advanced Options (p.
)
ä
Maintenance (p.
ä
Change Password (p.
ä
Clear
Password
This command clears the password. All commands normally requiring a password to be accessed will be freely available.
You have to con irm this command with
Clear or can change your mind with
Cancel
(Figure 137 , p.
130 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 129
6.14. Show Status FLIR Detection
Figure 137.
Removing the password
6.14 Show Status
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Maintenance (p.
)
ä
Show Status
Home (p.
)
ä
Info (p.
181 )
ä
System (p.
Settings (p.
ä
GPS and Clock (p.
)
ä
GPS (p.
)
This command displays various status and version information for your FLIR identiFINDER R300 on several pages (Figures 138 – 139 , p.
131 – 131 ).
Settings and Commands
System
⇋
GPS
Step through the status pages.
System
Various information about your FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Figure 138 , p.
131 ).
Serial Number
The serial number of your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Available Memory
The capacity remaining to store spectra, alarms, screenshots, etc.
You can free memory by erasing all or some of the data (see 6.16
, p.
133 ) if necessary.
Screenshots
The number of screen shots saved in memory.
IP Address
The IP address of your FLIR identiFINDER R300. You need this address to communicate with the instrument from a computer (see 6.26
, p.
152 ).
130 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 138.
FLIR identiFINDER R300 status display: System
Software
The version of the software.
GPS
Your current location determined from the GPS data received by the FLIR identiFINDER R300
(Figure 139 , p.
131 ).
Figure 139.
FLIR identiFINDER R300 status display: GPS
The GPS status data are shown only if the GPS receiver is switched on (see 6.11
, p.
127 ).
Satellites
The number of satellites currently “visible” to the FLIR identiFINDER R300. The more satellites, the better the precision of the location data.
If this number drops below 3, the given location is invalid. It is either the most recent valid location, or, if there was no valid location since you switched on the FLIR identiFINDER R300, the intersection of the Greenwich meridian and the equator.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 131
6.15. Reset Factory Settings FLIR Detection
Latitude
The current location north or south of the equator given in angle degrees, minutes and seconds.
Longitude
The current location west or east of the prime meridian passing through the Royal Observatory in Greenwich (UK) given in angle degrees, minutes and seconds.
Altitude
The current altitude in meters above or below the mean sea level as de ined by the
WGS84 geoid used by GPS.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.15 Reset Factory Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Maintenance (p.
)
ä
Reset Factory Settings
This command (Figure 140 , p.
132 ) discards all changes you made to any of the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s settings and reestablishes the settings made at the factory.
The password (see 2.2.7
, p.
46 ), if any, is reset to the factory setting as well.
Figure 140.
Reestablishing the factory default settings
Settings and Commands
Reset
Discard all your personal settings and return to the factory default settings.
132 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Cancel
Keep the current settings and return to the superior menu.
6.16
Erase All Spectra
Options Menu (p.
)
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Maintenance (p.
)
ä
Erase Data (p.
)
ä
Erase All Spectra
This command (Figure 141 , p.
133 ) deletes all spectra saved in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database, including min/max/average for dose rate and neutron, GPS location, and identi ication, if any.
Figure 141.
Deleting saved spectra
Settings and Commands
Erase
Delete all saved spectra.
Cancel
Keep the saved spectra and return to the superior menu.
6.17
Erase All Alarms
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
ä
Advanced Options (p.
)
ä
Maintenance (p.
ä
Erase Data (p.
ä
Erase All Alarms
This command (compare Figure 141 , p.
133 ) deletes all alarms saved in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s permanent memory.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 133
6.18. Erase All Screenshots FLIR Detection
Settings and Commands
Delete all saved alarms.
Keep the saved alarms and return to the superior menu.
6.18 Erase All Screenshots
Options Menu (p.
)
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
)
ä
Maintenance (p.
ä
Erase Data (p.
)
ä
Erase All
Screenshots
This command (compare Figure 141 , p.
133 ) deletes all screenshots saved in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s permanent memory.
Settings and Commands
Delete all screenshots.
Keep the screenshots and return to the superior menu.
6.19
Self Test
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Maintenance (p.
)
ä
Self Test
This command tests the display screen and activates all the alarm annunciators to demonstrate their proper operation.
Settings and Commands
Start the test. The display should show several test patterns in the main colors red, green and blue.
Further tests regard the alarm LEDs, the vibrator, and the beeper. Follow the list of tests displayed (Figure 143 , p.
135 ) and verify that the annunciators are working.
Return to the superior menu.
134 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 142.
Starting a self test of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 143.
Testing the annunciators.
6.20
Automated Mode Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Data Logging (p.
)
ä
Automated Mode Settings
Settings (p.
ä
General (p.
184 )
ä
Measurement (p.
184 )
This screen (Figure 144 , p.
136 ) groups settings regarding the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s automated identi ication mode (see 4.4
, p.
93 ).
Settings and Commands
Time Interval
Choose one of the available intervals for automated identi ication measurements:
Off, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60 min, On Dose Rate Warning.
The scheduled times will be rounded relative to the full hour.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 135
6.20. Automated Mode Settings FLIR Detection
Figure 144.
Automated Mode Settings
Automated identi ication on dose rate warning
This feature can be helpful when used in controlled circumstances such as monitoring pedestrian low through a controlled choke point where the operator can manage the
“ low” and hold the line until the identi ication measurement is complete. This allows for hands-free operation and a simpli ied path to the required result.
Use of this feature in uncontrolled situations, however, can generate very confusing and disorienting information.
Consider, for example, trying to use this feature while in the middle of a crowd with people moving in multiple directions. The instrument may register a passing warning and initiate an identi ication measurement on a target that continues to move away. This target could continue to move away in any direction so as to place the operator in a dilemma – what to do? It is highly likely that the instrument will fail to complete the identi ication process so concluding with an inconclusive and useless result.
It is highly recommended that this mode ONLY be used when the situation is controlled and manageable.
The success of the instrument or operator unit can be adversely affected if this advice is not followed though there is no fault of either the instrument or the operator.
FLIR Detection, Inc. also wishes to avoid the performance of the instrument being called into question through no fault of the instrument.
Next Measurement
The scheduled time of the next measurement.
Measurements
The number of measurements recorded since activating automated measurements.
136 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.21 Send Identi cation
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
ä
Advanced Options (p.
)
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Send Data (p.
)
ä
Send
Identi cation
This command initiates a multi-step procedure to send a record of identi ication results stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database to a remote server (see 9 , p.
219 ).
The procedure to send identi ication results is the same as that for sending spectra. The only difference is in the contents of the ile sent. This description applies to both this and the Send
Spectrum command (see 6.22
, p.
140 ).
You can choose from the identi ication results available in the database (Figure 145 , p.
137 ). The date and time of saving the identi ication is displayed while you step through the available data.
Figure 145.
Sending Data: Choosing a record of identi ication results
If you entered this command from the Identi ication Mode (see 4.3
, p.
90 ) or the spectrum display (see 6.2
, p.
106 ), the correct record is already chosen.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 137
6.21. Send Identi cation FLIR Detection
A summary of the chosen identi ication is shown (Figure 146 , p.
138 ) so you can verify your choice and choose other data if necessary.
The spectrum analyzed to compute the identi ication results is always included with the sent data.
Figure 146.
Sending Data: Identi ication summary
Settings and Commands
Choose
Choose another record for sending (Figure 145 , p.
137 ).
Send
Start sending the chosen data.
Several settings (see 9 , p.
219 ) are required to send data. If any one of these settings is missing, you will be noti ied (Figure 147 , p.
139 ) and routed to the appropriate screen to enter the missing setting.
We recommend specifying the required settings before sending data (see 6.24
, p.
149 and 6.27
, p.
153 ). The most convenient way to do so is via the web interface (see
, p.
During the transfer of data you will be kept posted about the progress of the transmission steps (Figure 148 , p.
139 ).
After all data are successfully transferred, you will be noti ied (Figure 149 , p.
140 ) and can acknowledge the message with
OK
.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
138 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 147.
Sending Data: Incomplete settings
Figure 148.
Sending Data: Transmission progress
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 139
6.22. Send Spectrum FLIR Detection
Figure 149.
Sending Data: Mission accomplished
6.22 Send Spectrum
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
ä
Advanced Options (p.
)
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Send Data (p.
)
ä
Send
Spectrum
This command initiates a multi-step procedure to send a spectrum stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database to a remote server (see 9 , p.
219 ).
The procedure is the same as that for sending identi ication results. The description of the procedure is not repeated here, please refer to section 6.21
, p.
137 .
The only difference is in the contents of the ile sent. You can choose from the results available in the database (Figure 150 , p.
141 ). The date and time of saving the result is displayed while you step through the available records.
If you entered this command from the spectrum display (see 6.2
, p.
106 ), the correct spectrum is already chosen.
A summary of the chosen record is shown (Figure 151 , p.
141 ) so you can verify your choice and choose another one if necessary.
Please refer to section 6.21
, p.
137 for a description of the remaining steps to send data to a remote server.
140 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 150.
Sending Data: Choosing a spectrum
Figure 151.
Sending Data: Spectrum summary
6.23
Bluetooth
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 supports two Bluetooth modes: Bluetooth Serial Port Protocol (SPP) and Bluetooth Periphery. While Bluetooth SPP Mode is enabled, Bluetooth Periphery Mode is disabled. Bluetooth SPP Mode supports a command set (see A.6
, p.
245 ) for system integrators to develop custom remote interfaces. These two modes are described in the following sections.
6.23.1
Bluetooth SPP Status
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Bluetooth SPP (p.
ä
Bluetooth SPP Status
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 141
6.23. Bluetooth FLIR Detection
This screen (Figure 152 , p.
142 ) shows if the Bluetooth SPP mode is enabled and whether the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently Discoverable.
Figure 152.
Bluetooth SPP
Settings and Commands
Status
Indicates whether Enable SPP (see 6.23.2
, p.
142 ) is set to On (Enabled) or Off (Disabled) .
Discoverable
Indicates if the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently discoverable or not discoverable via
Bluetooth in SPP Mode.
Settings
View and change the Bluetooth SPP Mode settings.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.23.2
Bluetooth SPP Settings
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Bluetooth SPP (p.
ä
Bluetooth SPP Status (p.
141 )
ä
Bluetooth SPP Settings
Settings (p.
ä
Bluetooth SPP Settings (p.
)
ä
Bluetooth SPP Settings (p.
This screen (Figure 153 , p.
143 ) allows you to con igure the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Bluetooth
Serial Port Protocol mode.
142 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 153.
Bluetooth SPP
Settings and Commands
Enable SPP
When set to On the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will attempt to connect in SPP mode using the
Bluetooth SPP settings. If set to Off, then Bluetooth Periphery mode can be enabled (see
6.23.3
, p.
144 ).
Timeout
Specify the maximum elapsed time during which the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will be discoverable after discovery is initiated. You can specify values from 0 s to 100000 s. A value of 0 s will disable discovery timeout.
Disconnect
This speci ies how the FLIR identiFINDER R300 should con igure the Bluetooth SPP Mode after a Bluetooth connection is lost.
Discover
If a Bluetooth SPP connection is lost, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will enable Discovery for the speci ied timeout period.
Off
If a Bluetooth SPP connection is lost, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will disable Bluetooth.
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 143
6.23. Bluetooth FLIR Detection
6.23.3
Bluetooth Periphery
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Bluetooth Periphery
This command (Figure 154 , p.
144 ) shows the Bluetooth device your FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently paired with, if any, and lets you search the vicinity for other suitable Bluetooth devices supporting dial-up networking ( 9 , p.
219 ).
Name of the Currently Paired
Bluetooth Device
Figure 154.
Bluetooth Periphery
If SPP Enabled is displayed, then you must irst disable the Bluetooth SPP Mode ( 6.23.2
, p.
142 ) before using Bluetooth Periphery Mode.
144
Figure 155.
SPP Enabled
If your FLIR identiFINDER R300 is not currently paired with any Bluetooth device, the
Change Device command (see below) is executed irst.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Settings and Commands
Bluetooth Device Name
The name of the device the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently paired with. Selecting this item shows details about this device (Figure 162 , p.
148 ).
Change Device
Guides you through the steps necessary to pair your FLIR identiFINDER R300 with a Bluetooth device.
Ô
To pair with a Bluetooth device…
1. Prepare the Bluetooth device and make sure it can be found (perhaps called “discoverable” or “visible” in the device’s settings).
2. Place the device in the vicinity of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (up to ca. 10 m (33 ft)).
3. Initiate a search for devices with
Start Search
(Figure 156 , p.
145 ).
Figure 156.
Ready to search for Bluetooth devices
4. Wait a few moments while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 searches for Bluetooth devices supporting the required protocol (Figure 157 , p.
146 ).
5. You can repeat the search if no device was found (Figure 158 , p.
146 ) with
Search
.
6. Choose the desired Bluetooth device from the list shown (Figure 159 , p.
147 ) with
Down
.
The device names are listed exactly as received from the detected devices. In case of ambiguous names, you should change the name of the Bluetooth device to something unique (refer to the manuals of your Bluetooth devices on how to achieve that).
If your desired device is not shown in the list, make sure its setup is correct, press
Exit
, select the command
Bluetooth Periphery again and start another search.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 145
6.23. Bluetooth FLIR Detection
Figure 157.
Searching for Bluetooth devices
146
Figure 158.
No devices detected
7. To start the pairing with the chosen device, press
Select
.
8. Choose the PIN type for a trusted connection (Figure 160 , p.
147 ).
Most devices require the entry of an ad hoc random PIN to establish a trusted connection. Other devices require the usage of a ixed PIN like
0000
or
1234
.
For questions refer to the manual that came with your Bluetooth device.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 159.
List of suitable Bluetooth devices detected
Figure 160.
Selecting a PIN for the pairing of Bluetooth devices
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 147
6.23. Bluetooth FLIR Detection
9. If your device requires a PIN entry, use the PIN shown on your FLIR identiFINDER R300 screen (Figure 161 , p.
148 ).
Figure 161.
Pairing with a Bluetooth device
10. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 shows some information about the Bluetooth device after a successful pairing (Figure 162 , p.
148 ).
Figure 162.
Paired to a Bluetooth device
An error message (Figure 163 , p.
149 ) is displayed if pairing failed. Make sure the
Bluetooth device is correctly con igured, still in the vicinity, and try again.
Your FLIR identiFINDER R300 is now ready to communicate via the Bluetooth device.
Make sure not to move the Bluetooth device more than about 10 m (33 ft) away from the
FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
148 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 163.
Pairing to a Bluetooth device failed
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.24
Remote Server Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Remote Server Settings
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity (p.
ä
Remote Server (p.
)
This screen (Figure 164 , p.
149 ) groups settings that in luence the transfer of FLIR identiFINDER R300 data to a remote server. Refer to Chapter 9 , p.
219 for details of this method.
Figure 164.
Upper items of the remote server settings
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 149
6.25. Mass Storage FLIR Detection
Settings and Commands
The user name and the password as provided by your cell phone carrier.
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
The connection info as provided by your cell phone carrier.
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
The phone number to access a data connection as provided by your cell phone carrier or cell phone vendor.
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
The address of the server receiving data from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 via Bluetooth or the web interface.
.
.
,
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
Edit composite and text values, see 2.2.4
, p.
40 and 2.2.6
, p.
43 for details.
Return to the superior menu.
6.25
Mass Storage
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Mass Storage
This command (Figure 165 , p.
151 ) lets the FLIR identiFINDER R300 behave like a write-protected
USB mass storage device similar to a hard disk or a USB stick. You can connect it to a local computer
( 7.2
, p.
170 ) to copy iles from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to the computer.
150 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 165.
Starting the USB mass storage mode
Settings and Commands
Start
Start the USB mass storage mode (Figure 166 , p.
151 ).
Figure 166.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 in USB mass storage mode
All of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 network services will stop and after a few moments the
FLIR identiFINDER R300 will be recognized as an external hard disk by the connected computer. Use the ile manager of your computer to inspect, for example, the drivers on the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
While the FLIR identiFINDER R300 acts as a hard drive, you cannot operate it. Routine jobs like monitoring the radiation for exceeding the alarm thresholds are not interrupted.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 151
6.26. Network FLIR Detection
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 hard drive is write protected, that is, you cannot modify or add any data.
Exit
Return to the superior menu. The FLIR identiFINDER R300’s network services will be reactivated.
6.26 Network
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Network
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity (p.
ä
Local Area Network (p.
This screen (Figure 167 , p.
152 ) groups settings related to the connections between your FLIR identiFINDER R300 and a computer.
Figure 167.
Network settings
It is recommended to restart your FLIR identiFINDER R300 after changing network settings.
If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently connected to an external device, you have to reestablish the connection according to the new settings.
Settings and Commands
Device Name
The name of this FLIR identiFINDER R300 to identify it in communication with other devices.
Spaces are not allowed in this text.
152 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
USB Subnet
To connect to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 via IP, it must have an IP address. This address is taken from one of the pools of IP addresses reserved by the IANA for private networks. You can choose from the listed pools.
Try to avoid subnets already in use in your local area network. Ask your network administrator when in doubt which pool best suits your network environment.
172.* Network
1 048 576 addresses from
172.16.0.0
to
172.31.255.255
10.* Network
16 777 216 addresses from
10.0.0.0
to
10.255.255.255
192.168.* Network
65 536 addresses from
192.168.0.0
to
192.168.255.255
You can choose the subnet but not the IP address. The address is ixed and remains always the same for a given instrument.
The current IP address is shown on-screen whenever the FLIR identiFINDER R300 detects a connection to a network (Figure 199 , p.
178 ).
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.27
Report Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Report Settings
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity (p.
ä
Reports (p.
)
This screen (Figure 168 , p.
154 ) groups settings specifying the content of reports you can download
via the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s web interface ( 8
, p.
) or send to remote servers ( 9 , p.
219 ).
Settings and Commands
Operator Name
Your name and…
Voice Phone your phone number for inclusion in reports.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 153
6.28. Download Settings FLIR Detection
Figure 168.
Report settings
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Left , Right , Insert , Delete
Edit composite and text values, see 2.2.4
, p.
40 and 2.2.6
, p.
43 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.28
Download Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Download Settings
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity (p.
ä
Download Options (p.
This screen (Figure 169 , p.
155 ) lists several ile formats available for transferring recorded data
from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a connected computer ( 8
, p.
). You can accelerate the downloads by excluding ile types not needed in your work low. For example, the formats
*.n42
,
*.spc
, and
*.spe
usually contain the same information in different formats.
Some ile formats are not available for all types of data.
Settings and Commands
.n42 (2012)
Files formatted according to the 2012 edition of the ANSI N42.42 Standard.
154 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 169.
Download settings
.n42 (2006)
Files formatted according to the 2006 edition of the ANSI N42.42 Standard.
…
Other ile formats.
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.29
Gamma, Neutron Counters
Options Menu (p.
ä
Gamma, Neutron Counters
This command displays the state of various counters (Figure 170 , p.
156 ). If your variant is equipped with a neutron detector, its results will be shown as well (Figure 171 , p.
156 ).
The counters for gamma and neutrons (if available) are reset when you switch on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 or when you reset them explicitly (see below).
The counter for dose keeps accumulating data until you explicitly reset it (see below).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 155
6.29. Gamma, Neutron Counters FLIR Detection
Figure 170.
Gamma counter information
Figure 171.
Gamma and neutron counter information (Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.)
Settings and Commands
Gamma Counts
The accumulated gamma counts registered by the detector crystals.
Counting Duration
The time frame, in seconds, in which the neutrons shown at the bottom and gamma counts shown above were measured.
Gamma Dose
The accumulated gamma dose. You can specify the unit used for display, see 6.31
, p.
159 .
Dose Duration
The time span, in seconds, in which the gamma dose shown above was measured.
156 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Neutrons
The accumulated neutron counts.
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Neutron Rate
The current neutron rate in counts per second
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Reset Dose
Reset both the Gamma Dose and Dose Duration. Measuring is not interrupted, merely the accumulated values are set to zero.
Stop
⇋
Reset
Stop the accumulation of data for neutrons (if available) and gamma.
To reset the accumulators and timers for neutrons (if available) and gamma counts to zero and resume accumulating new data, press again.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.30
Finder Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
Finder Settings
Settings (p.
ä
General (p.
184 )
ä
Measurement (p.
184 )
This screen (Figure 172 , p.
157 ) groups options that in luence the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s behavior in Finder mode (see
Figure 172.
Finder settings
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 157
6.30. Finder Settings FLIR Detection
Settings and Commands
Choose “Yes” to enable selection of Finder mode or “No” to disable.
Specify the time for which the FLIR identiFINDER R300 should average the measured count rate.
You can choose from 1 s – 2 s – 5 s.
The smaller the value, the more lively the display; the larger the value, the better the chance to ind weaker sources.
Specify the sensitivity for audible feedback in Finder mode (see
values from 50 to 200 %.
While in Finder mode, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 emits sound when the count rate rises above a threshold 𝐶 which is represented by the dashed line across the top of the Finder display (Figure 90 , p.
89 ).
The threshold is related to the average background count rate ⟨𝐵𝐶𝑅⟩ (measured when you enter the Finder mode), its variation 𝜎 = ⟨𝐵𝐶𝑅⟩, and the sensitivity you specify here according to
100
𝐶 = ⟨𝐵𝐶𝑅⟩ + 3.5 ∗ 𝜎 ∗
Sensitivity [%]
This equation is solved for some common values of the background variation 𝜎 in Table
, p.
158 . Look up the sensitivity value next to the desired 𝜎 and enter it.
Table 2.
Finder Mode: Background variation vs. sensitivity 𝜎
7
6.5
6
5.5
5
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.75
Sensitivity [%]
50
54
58
64
70
78
88
100
117
140
175
200
158 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.31 Dose Rate Settings
Options Menu (p.
ä
Dose Rate Settings
Settings (p.
ä
General (p.
184 )
ä
Measurement (p.
184 )
This screen (Figure 173 , p.
159 ) groups options that in luence the display of dose and dose rate values (see 4.1
, p.
86 ).
Figure 173.
Dose rate settings
Settings and Commands
Displayed Unit
Choose the unit for the display of dose rates.
This setting in luences all displays of dose and dose rate values, for example the display of dose alarm thresholds (see 6.33
, p.
161 ).
Sievert
Sievert is a derived unit according to the International System of Units and the legally prescribed unit in many jurisdictions.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 159
6.32. Alarm Indicators FLIR Detection rem
Röntgen equivalent in man. rem is an outdated unit and no longer allowed in many jurisdictions.
1 Sv = 100 rem.
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.32 Alarm Indicators
Options Menu (p.
ä
Alarm Options (p.
)
ä
Alarm Indicators
Settings (p.
ä
Alarm (p.
ä
Alarm Indicators (p.
)
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 reports various events with on-screen messages. Additionally, you can have it report events, especially alarms, with other methods (Figure 174 , p.
160 ). You can switch each of the annunciation methods independently.
Figure 174.
Alarm indication settings
The signals used to report alarms are detailed in chapter
Settings and Commands
LEDs
Switch the alarm LEDs on or off.
160 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
This setting does not affect the power status LED. It cannot be switched off.
Beeper
Switch the beeper on or off.
Vibrator
Switch the vibrator on or off.
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.33 Dose Alarm Thresholds
Options Menu (p.
ä
Alarm Options (p.
)
ä
Dose Alarm Thresholds
Settings (p.
ä
Alarm (p.
ä
Gamma Alarms (p.
189 )
This screen (Figure 175 , p.
161 ) groups the thresholds for dose alarms and warnings.
Specify the thresholds by setting a value with a unit. The base unit (Sv or rem) available here re lects your preferences (see 6.31
, p.
159 ).
You can specify values between 1 nSv and 1 Sv (100 nrem to 100 rem).
For meaningful alerts, specify an alarm threshold above the warning threshold.
Figure 175.
Dose alarm threshold settings
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 161
6.34. Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds FLIR Detection
Settings and Commands
The value with unit for the alarm threshold. Use “Off” (the lowest value) to suppress this alarm. Available units are nSv – µSv – mSv – Sv (nrem – µrem – mrem – rem)
The value with unit for the warning threshold. Use “Off” (the lowest value) to suppress this warning. Available units are nSv – µSv – mSv – Sv (nrem – µrem – mrem – rem)
.
.
,
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
.
.
,
Edit composite values, see 2.2.4
, p.
40 for details.
Return to the superior menu.
6.34
Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds
Options Menu (p.
ä
Alarm Options (p.
)
ä
Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds
Settings (p.
ä
Alarm (p.
ä
Gamma Alarms (p.
189 )
This screen (Figure 176 , p.
163 ) groups the thresholds for dose rate alarms and warnings.
Specify the thresholds by setting a value with a unit. The base unit (Sv/h or rem/h) available here re lects your preferences (see 6.31
, p.
159 ).
You can specify values between 1 nSv/h and 1 Sv/h (100 nrem/h to 100 rem/h).
For meaningful alerts, specify an alarm threshold above the warning threshold.
Settings and Commands
The value with unit for the alarm threshold. Use “Off” (the lowest value) to suppress this alarm. Available units are nSv/h – µSv/h – mSv/h – Sv/h (nrem/h – µrem/h – mrem/h – rem/h)
162 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
Figure 176.
Dose rate alarm threshold settings
Warning
The value with unit for the warning threshold. Use “Off” (the lowest value) to suppress this alarm. Available units are nSv/h – µSv/h – mSv/h – Sv/h (nrem/h – µrem/h – mrem/h – rem/h) 𝜎
Alarm
The sensitivity of the detection of unusual gamma radiation increases (see 5.3
, p.
101 ).
You can specify “Off” to suppress the noti ications or a value from 1.1 to 9.9. The lower the value, the better the sensitivity for radiation increases but the more noti ications you can expect. Higher values are recommended to reduce false noti ications in environments with generally low radiation levels.
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Left , Right
Edit composite values, see 2.2.4
, p.
40 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
6.35
Neutron Alarm Thresholds
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with a neutron detector (see
, p.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 163
6.35. Neutron Alarm Thresholds FLIR Detection
Options Menu (p.
ä
Alarm Options (p.
)
ä
Neutron Alarm Thresholds
Settings (p.
ä
Alarm (p.
ä
Neutron Alarms (p.
This screen (Figure 177 , p.
164 ) groups the thresholds for neutron warnings and alarms.
For meaningful alerts, specify an alarm threshold above the warning threshold.
Figure 177.
Neutron alarm threshold settings
Settings and Commands
Alarm
The minimum number of neutrons per minute to trigger an alarm.
You can specify values between 2 and 500.
Warning
The minimum number of neutrons per minute to trigger a warning.
You can specify values between 2 and 500.
𝜎
Alarm
The state of noti ications on unusual increase of neutrons detected (see 5.3
, p.
101 ).
You can specify “On” or “Off”.
Down , Select
Choose and select menu items, see 2.2.2
, p.
35 for details.
+ , , Accept , Cancel
Edit values, see 2.2.3
, p.
37 for details.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
164 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 6. FLIR identiFINDER R300 Menu Reference
6.36
Current Alarm State
Options Menu (p.
ä
Alarm Options (p.
)
ä
Current Alarm State
This screen (Figure 178 , p.
165 ) is identical to the alarm screen always shown when a warning or an alarm is raised (compare
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 178.
Current Alarm State
Settings and Commands
Mute
Switch off the beeper and vibrator for the current alarm, if any. The next alarm, if any, reactivates sound and vibration.
Exit
Return to the superior menu.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 165
FLIR Detection 7. Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer
Chapter 7
Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a
Local Computer
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can be connected to a computer via Universal Serial Bus (USB).
The connection between the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and the computer serves two purposes:
Energy Supply
The computer provides external power for running the FLIR identiFINDER R300 or charging the batteries. Refer to chapter 11 , p.
229 for details.
Data Communication
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 supports several methods of data communication via USB which are explained in this and the following chapter.
Mass Storage Device
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can behave as a mass storage device to transfer data to the computer.
This mode is exclusive, that is, no other data communication is possible while the
FLIR identiFINDER R300 behaves as a mass storage device.
Web Server
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can act as a web server you can access in a web browser to download data or to operate the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and change its settings with the enhanced convenience of a large screen and a real keyboard.
The remainder of this chapter explains:
• How to set up the physical connection ( 7.1
• How to use the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a mass storage device ( 7.2
, p.
170 )
• How to prepare the computer ( 7.3
, p.
171 ) for accessing the web interface detailed in chapter
, p.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 167
7.1. Plugging and Unplugging FLIR Detection
7.1
Plugging and Unplugging
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 draws a current of approximately 400 mA. Before connecting to a computer, please make sure the USB outlet of the computer complies with this requirement.
This might not be the case with some laptops, netbooks or similar battery powered devices.
....
Figure 179.
Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Mini USB-B connector) and a computer (USB-A connector)
The USB socket of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is at the lower end of the instrument. It is covered by a lap in the rubber boot (Figure
).
..
Figure 180.
USB socket covered by a lap in the rubber boot
Use the Mini USB-B to USB-A cable supplied with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to establish the connection.
You can use any equivalent third-party USB 2.0 cable.
168 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 7. Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer
Always grab the plug at the strain relief and slide it straight into or out of the receptacle (Figure 181 , p.
169 ).
Figure 181.
Plugging and unplugging the cable
Do not pull at the cable behind the connector and do not bend it when removing it from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Figure 182 , p.
169 ).
Figure 182.
Do not bend the cable or the plug!
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 169
7.2. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a Mass Storage Device FLIR Detection
7.2
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a Mass Storage Device
Computers supporting the connection of USB devices usually have a driver for devices identifying themselves as mass storage, for example USB sticks or USB hard disks. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 supports the same standard.
You can use this mode of operation, for example, to install the drivers for the web interface access
( 7.3
, p.
171 ).
Ô
To mount the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as USB mass storage…
1. Switch the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to mass storage mode (see
Mass Storage
,
, p.
2. Connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to the computer with the included cable.
The mass storage device shows up on your computer after a few moments (Figure 183 , p.
170 ).
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 hard drive is write protected, that is, you cannot modify or add any data.
170
Figure 183.
FLIR identiFINDER R300 mounted as mass storage device on a computer running Microsoft
Windows 7
Ô
To unmount the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as USB mass storage…
1. Follow the standard procedure for unmounting mass storage devices as recommended by your operating system. Please refer to the manual or help system that came with your operating system for details.
2. Unplug the connection cable.
3. Press
Exit on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to return from USB mass storage mode to normal operation (see
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 7. Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer
7.3
Preparing the USB Network Connection on a Computer
Depending on the operating system of your computer, you might need to install additional software to access the web interface (see
) of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
7.3.1
Linux
No special installation is required for recent Linux distributions. Fedora 13, Ubuntu 10.04, Ubuntu
11.04, and Ubuntu 12.04 were tested successfully. There should be a good chance with other modern distributions as well.
Just connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to the computer with the included cable and you are ready to go.
7.3.2
Windows XP
You must install the driver software included within the FLIR identiFINDER R300 before you can use the USB network connection of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
This installation requires you to have administrator privileges for your computer. Ask your
IT administrator if in doubt.
The driver installer is included with the FLIR identiFINDER R300, you can access it via the USB mass storage mode ( 7.2
, p.
170 ).
Ô
To install the driver software…
1. Start the mass storage connection from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer (see
7.2
, p.
170 ).
2. Open the folder
Drivers
containing the installer.
3. Start the installer by double-clicking its icon (Figure 184 , p.
171 ).
Figure 184.
FLIR RNDIS driver installer
4. Follow the instructions given on-screen (Figure 185 , p.
172 ).
If a FLIR RNDIS driver is already installed on your PC, you will be guided through the deinstallation before the installation begins.
5. You might get asked whether to install this software (Figure 186 , p.
172 ).
Please click
Continue Anyway
.
The installation will inish in a few moments (Figure 187 , p.
173 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 171
7.3. Preparing the USB Network Connection on a Computer FLIR Detection
Figure 185.
Beginning of the installation
Figure 186.
Installation warning
6. Stop the mass storage connection from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer (see
7.2
, p.
170 ).
Whenever you connect a computer and a FLIR identiFINDER R300 which is not in the USB mass storage mode, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 identi ies itself as an RNDIS device. A computer running
Microsoft Windows XP detecting the device checks whether the device is known and will report the detection of new hardware if not (Figure 188 , p.
173 ).
172 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 7. Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer
Figure 187.
End of the installation
Figure 188.
Windows XP reporting new hardware at the noti ication area.
Ô
To install the software for new hardware…
Windows launches the wizard for new hardware (Figure 189 , p.
173 ).
Figure 189.
Windows XP New Hardware Wizard
1. Click
No, not this time to avoid searching the Internet for a driver.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 173
7.3. Preparing the USB Network Connection on a Computer
2. Proceed to the following page (Figure 190 , p.
174 ) by clicking
Next
.
FLIR Detection
Figure 190.
Specifying a driver source
3. Click
Install the software automatically (Recommended) you installed as described above.
to have the system search for the driver
4. Proceed to the following page by clicking
Next
.
5. You might get asked whether to install this software (Figure 191 , p.
174 ).
Please click
Continue Anyway
.
174
Figure 191.
Installation warning
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 7. Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer
The installation will inish in a few moments and you get noti ied in the noti ication area
(Figure 192 , p.
175 ).
Figure 192.
End of the installation
6. You are now ready to use the web interface of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 (see
You will have to repeat these steps for every FLIR identiFINDER R300 you connect to your computer, sometimes even if you connect the same instrument to a different USB port of your computer.
Ô
To remove the driver software…
1. Open the Windows System Control Panel.
2. Open
Add/Remove Software
.
3. Select the
FLIR RNDIS Driver
from the list by clicking its entry.
4. Click
Remove and follow the instructions given on-screen.
7.3.3
Windows Vista, Windows 7
You must install the driver software included within the FLIR identiFINDER R300 before you can use the USB network connection of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Microsoft Windows Vista and Windows 7 behave virtually identical regarding this installation. The following screenshots are taken from Windows 7.
This installation requires you to have administrator privileges for your computer. Ask your
IT administrator if in doubt.
The driver installer is included with the FLIR identiFINDER R300, you can access it via the USB mass storage mode ( 7.2
, p.
170 ).
Ô
To install the driver software…
1. Start the mass storage connection from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer (see
7.2
, p.
170 ).
2. Open the folder
Drivers
containing the installer.
3. Start the installer by double clicking its icon (Figure 193 , p.
176 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 175
7.3. Preparing the USB Network Connection on a Computer FLIR Detection
Figure 193.
FLIR RNDIS driver installer
Figure 194.
Installation warning
4. You will be asked whether you want to allow the installation of software (Figure 194 , p.
176 ).
Please click
Yes
.
5. Follow the instructions given on-screen (Figure 195 , p.
177 ).
If a FLIR RNDIS driver is already installed on your PC, you will be guided through the deinstallation before the installation begins.
The installation will inish in a few moments (Figure 196 , p.
177 ).
6. Stop the mass storage connection from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer (see
7.2
, p.
170 ).
Whenever you connect a computer and a FLIR identiFINDER R300 which is not in the USB mass storage mode, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 identi ies itself as an RNDIS device. A computer running
Microsoft Windows Windows 7 detecting the device checks whether the device is known and will report the detection of new hardware if not (Figure 197 , p.
177 ).
176 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 7. Connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Local Computer
Figure 195.
Beginning of the installation
Figure 196.
End of the installation
Figure 197.
Windows 7 reporting and con iguring new hardware
The system installs the driver software for the device and reports when the device is ready to use in the noti ication area (Figure 198 , p.
178 ).
You are now ready to use the web interface of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 (see
).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 177
7.4. Using the Network Connection FLIR Detection
Figure 198.
End of the installation
Ô
To remove the driver software…
1. Open the Windows System Control Panel.
2. Open
Program\Programs and Features
.
3. Select the
FLIR RNDIS Driver
from the list by clicking its entry.
4. Click
Uninstall and follow the instructions given on-screen.
7.4
Using the Network Connection
When you connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to an appropriately con igured computer (see 7.3
, p.
171 ), it will show its addresses (Figure 199 , p.
178 ).
Figure 199.
Valid addresses of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 after a connection to a computer was established
One address contains the serial number of your FLIR identiFINDER R300, the other is an IP address according to the current settings (see 6.26
, p.
152 ). To access the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s web interface, simply point your web browser to one of the given addresses, for example to the IP address
http://172.16.0.1
Not all computers can use the address comprising the instrument’s serial number. Please use the IP address in this case.
178 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Chapter 8
Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
In principle, the web interface provides all the settings and commands you know from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 itself, but with the added convenience of a larger screen and a real keyboard.
Point your web browser to the address given after establishing a network connection (see 7.4
, p.
178 ). Please refer to section
for the principle operation of the web pages outlined below.
The main menu offers the following groups of web pages:
Inspect general information about the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Inspect and edit settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Inspect and download data from the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database
Remote control the screen and buttons of the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Acquire and analyze gamma spectra with the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Manage the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and install software updates
The complete hierarchy of web pages in the main and secondary menus and their sections is shown in the following list. References point to the manual sections explaining the listed items in more detail.
⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.1
, p.
181
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 179
⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅
⋅ ⋅
8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server FLIR Detection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.2
, p.
182
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.2
, p.
183
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.3
, p.
184
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.3.1
, p.
184
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.3.2
, p.
184
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.5.2
, p.
189
©
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
©
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
©
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.9
, p.
194
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.10
, p.
197
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.10
, p.
197
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.10
, p.
197
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.12
, p.
202
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.14
, p.
207
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
180 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Live Spectrum
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.16
, p.
209
Administration
⋅
Software Update
⋅
Password
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
⋅
System Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see 8.19
, p.
216
⋅ ⋅
Available Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see
8.1
Info (Web Page)
Home (p.
)
ä
Info
This web page displays diverse information regarding your FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Figure
, p.
System
This section (Figure
182 ) contains information about the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and
its con iguration.
Home (p.
)
ä
Info (p.
181 )
ä
System
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Maintenance (p.
)
ä
Show Status (p.
130 )
You should have this information ready when contacting our service (see
, p.
or
B.4
, p.
257 ).
Service
This section (Figure
182 ) contains the addresses of our service for various communi-
cation methods like traditional mail, fax, etc.
Home (p.
)
ä
Info (p.
181 )
ä
Service
If you click the link to a service e-mail address, your standard e-mail software will open with a new message already containing the relevant data of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 like serial number, versions etc.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 181
8.2. Resources (Web Page) FLIR Detection
..
Figure 200.
Info web page
8.2
Resources (Web Page)
Home (p.
)
ä
Resources
This web page (Figure 201 , p.
183 ) provides access to various resources stored on the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
This section (Figure 201 , p.
183 ) provides information about the open-source libraries used in the software of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Home (p.
)
ä
Resources (p.
ä
Open-Source Software
182 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Figure 201.
Resources web page
Download
Download the license or the source code of a library from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer.
Data Schemata
This section (Figure 201 , p.
183 ) offers the XML schemata describing the
*.xml
iles you can download or send from your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Home (p.
)
ä
Resources (p.
ä
Data Schemata
The schemata help you to interpret the iles and to develop your own software for further processing the iles.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 183
8.3. General (Web Page) FLIR Detection
Download
Download a schema from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to your computer.
8.3
General (Web Page)
Settings (p.
ä
General
This web page (Figure
185 ) provides access to various settings of the FLIR
identiFINDER R300 for inspection or editing.
To transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300, click
Save
.
8.3.1
Measurement
Settings (p.
ä
General (p.
184 )
ä
Measurement
This web page section (Figure
, p.
185 ) lets you inspect or edit settings related to the measure-
ment of gamma radiation.
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
Dose Rate Settings (p.
159 )
Options Menu (p.
ä
Finder Settings (p.
157 )
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Data Logging (p.
)
ä
Automated Mode Settings (p.
135 )
8.3.2
Identi cation
Settings (p.
ä
General (p.
184 )
ä
Identi cation
This web page section (Figure
, p.
) lets you inspect or edit settings regarding measurement and presentation of identi ication results.
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Settings (p.
116 )
184 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
..
Figure 202.
General Settings web page
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 185
8.4. GPS and Clock (Web Page) FLIR Detection
8.3.3
User Interface
Settings (p.
ä
General (p.
184 )
ä
User Interface
This web page section (Figure
, p.
185 ) lets you inspect or edit settings regarding the screen and
keyboard of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
General Options (p.
)
ä
Display Settings (p.
122 )
8.4
GPS and Clock (Web Page)
Settings (p.
ä
GPS and Clock
This settings web page lets you inspect and specify GPS location and clock settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
This web page section (Figure
, p.
187 ) lets you inspect and edit GPS settings of the FLIR
identiFINDER R300.
Settings (p.
)
ä
GPS and Clock (p.
)
ä
GPS
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
General Options (p.
)
ä
GPS Settings (p.
127 )
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Maintenance (p.
)
ä
Show Status (p.
130 )
...
.
.
Switch the GPS receiver On or Off.
If the GPS receiver is on and the reception is good enough, the GPS coordinates of the current location are stored with measurement results.
If the GPS reception is not good enough, for example inside buildings, the current location cannot be determined. If a location could be determined from GPS data since you switched on the FLIR identiFINDER R300, the last valid location is used. Otherwise, the position of the intersection of the Greenwich Meridian with the Equator is used (0° N,
0° E).
Additionally, the clock of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is set according to the highprecision time received from the GPS satellites.
.
.
Transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
The current location of the FLIR identiFINDER R300, if GPS is on and receives satellite data.
186 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
..
Figure 203.
The GPS and Clock settings web page
.
.
Sends the shown GPS coordinates to the GeoHack page on the Wikimedia
Toolserver, a free service of Wikimedia Deutschland e.V. (Internet access required).
The service links to international servers of maps, satellite images, aerial photographs etc. which cover the coordinates saved with your record.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 187
8.5. Alarm (Web Page) FLIR Detection
This web page section (Figure
) lets you inspect and edit settings for the clock of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Settings (p.
)
ä
GPS and Clock (p.
)
ä
Clock
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
General Options (p.
)
ä
Clock Settings (p.
125 )
.
.
t
Select your time zone from the list built into the FLIR identiFINDER R300. Time zones are speci ied as offset from UTC/GMT.
Periods for daylight savings time, however, might be different for the same offset from
UTC in various regions. To have the FLIR identiFINDER R300 consider the correct daylight savings time for your time zone, make sure to check the region info when selecting the offset.
Transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
The current time of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and your computer.
.
.
If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 does not get the current time via GPS, you can set the internal clock by setting it to the current time of your computer.
8.5
Alarm (Web Page)
Settings (p.
ä
Alarm
This web page (Figure 204 , p.
189 ) provides access to alarm settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 for inspection or editing.
To transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300, click .
8.5.1
Alarm Indicators
Settings (p.
ä
Alarm (p.
ä
Alarm Indicators
This web page section (Figure 204 , p.
189 ) lets you switch the alarm indicators of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 on or off.
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
Alarm Options (p.
)
ä
Alarm Indicators (p.
160 )
188 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Figure 204.
Alarm Settings web page
8.5.2 Gamma Alarms
Settings (p.
ä
Alarm (p.
ä
Gamma Alarms
This web page section (Figure 204 , p.
189 ) lets you inspect or set the thresholds for gamma alarms and warnings.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 189
8.6. Connectivity (Web Page) FLIR Detection
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
Alarm Options (p.
)
ä
Dose Alarm Thresholds (p.
161 )
Options Menu (p.
ä
Alarm Options (p.
)
ä
Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds (p.
8.5.3
Neutron Alarms
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with a neutron detector (see
, p.
Settings (p.
ä
Alarm (p.
ä
Neutron Alarms
This web page section (Figure 204 , p.
189 ) lets you inspect or set the thresholds for neutron alarms and warnings.
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
Alarm Options (p.
)
ä
Neutron Alarm Thresholds (p.
163 )
8.6
Connectivity (Web Page)
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity
This web page (Figure
191 ) comprises various settings of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 re-
lated to local and remote network connections.
To transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300, click
.
.
.
8.6.1
Local Area Network
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity (p.
ä
Local Area Network
This web page section (Figure
) lets you con igure the connection of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a local area network.
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Network (p.
152 )
It is recommended to restart your FLIR identiFINDER R300 after changing network settings.
If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is currently connected to an external device, you have to reestablish the connection according to the new settings.
190 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
..
Figure 205.
Connectivity Settings web page
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 191
8.7. Bluetooth SPP Settings (Web Page) FLIR Detection
8.6.2
Remote Server
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity (p.
ä
Remote Server
This web page section (Figure
) lets you con igure the connection of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a remote server via Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking.
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
)
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
ä
Remote Server Settings (p.
149 )
8.6.3
Reports
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity (p.
ä
Reports
This web page section (Figure
, p.
191 ) lets you con igure the contents of reports generated by
the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Report Settings (p.
153 )
8.6.4
Download Options
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity (p.
ä
Download Options
This web page section (Figure
191 ) lets you specify the type of the iles to be downloaded
from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a connected computer.
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Download Settings (p.
154 )
8.7
Bluetooth SPP Settings (Web Page)
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
Settings (p.
ä
Bluetooth SPP Settings
This section automatically forwards to the Bluetooth SPP Options web page (see
).
8.7.1
Bluetooth SPP Settings (Web Page)
This item is available for FLIR identiFINDER R300 variants with Bluetooth (see
, p.
Settings (p.
ä
Bluetooth SPP Settings (p.
)
ä
Bluetooth SPP Settings
192 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
This web page (Figure
, p.
193 ) allows you to enable and con igure the Bluetooth SPP mode.
..
Figure 206.
Bluetooth Settings web page
If identiFINDER R300 discoverable over Bluetooth for the
.
.
.
will make the FLIR mode. The PIN may be edited.
If identiFINDER R300 via Bluetooth will be disabled after a connection is terminated.
To transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300, click .
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Bluetooth SPP (p.
ä
Bluetooth SPP Status (p.
141 )
ä
Bluetooth SPP Settings (p.
142 )
8.8
Nuclides (Web Page)
Settings (p.
ä
Nuclides
This web page (Figure 207 , p.
194 ) lets you inspect and change nuclide data.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 193
8.9. Backup (Web Page) FLIR Detection
Figure 207.
Nuclide Settings web page
You can access these settings on the instrument as well. Please ind the details about the settings in chapter “FLIR identiFINDER R300 Reference” under
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Options (p.
)
ä
Nuclide Visibility (p.
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Options (p.
)
ä
Nuclide Usage (p.
119 )
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Identi cation Options (p.
)
ä
Nuclide Severity (p.
120 )
The severity of some nuclides is ixed. In these cases, the menu to set the severity is inactive.
To transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300, click
Save
.
8.9
Backup (Web Page)
Settings (p.
ä
Backup
This web page (Figure
195 ) lets you backup and restore the complete settings of the FLIR
identiFINDER R300.
194 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
..
Figure 208.
Backup web page
The instrument’s settings are saved in an
*.xml
ile. You can inspect or edit this ile with common text editors supporting UTF-8 or with specialized XML editors.
The settings in the ile are grouped into several categories and embedded comments help you ind your way around.
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
1 <?xml version=”1.0” encoding=”utf-8”?>
2 <settings modelnumber=”nanoRaider ZH” serialnumber=”103156000000”>
3 <category name=”Display”>
4 ...
</category>
<category name=”Alarm Indications”>
<!--Are warnings and alarms reported by the beeper?-->
<setting name=”SoundAlarmIndication” value=”True” />
<!--Are warnings and alarms reported by the vibrator?-->
<setting name=”VibratorAlarmIndication” value=”True” />
<!--Are warnings and alarms reported by LEDs?-->
12 <setting name=”LightsAlarmIndication” value=”True” />
13 </category>
14 <category name=”Feedback”>
15 ...
16 </category>
17 <category name=”Nuclide”>
18
19
<setting name=”Ag-110m” value=”True” />
<setting name=”Ag-110m-Usage” value=”IND” />
20
21
<setting name=”Ag-110m-Severity” value=”Innocent” />
<setting name=”Am-241” value=”True” /> to be continued…
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 195
8.9. Backup (Web Page) FLIR Detection
22
23
<setting name=”Am-241-Usage” value=”IND” />
<setting name=”Am-241-Severity” value=”Threatening” />
24 ...
25
26
27
<setting name=”Xe-133” value=”True” />
<setting name=”Xe-133-Usage” value=”MED” />
<setting name=”Xe-133-Severity” value=”Innocent” />
28 </category>
29 </settings>
You can use this ile, for example, to
• backup the settings and restore them after you experiment with various settings on the instrument,
• document the settings used in your team, or
• distribute identical settings to several instruments used in your team.
Uploaded settings iles may be incomplete, that is, they may contain only some settings. Using this method, you can distribute some settings to several instruments while other settings remain unchanged on the individual instrument.
The name of a settings ile starts with the serial number of the instrument.
.
.
.
Download the settings ile to your computer.
Specify a settings ile to be uploaded to your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
.
.
.
.
.
Enter the path to the settings ile.
Use your computer’s standard method to choose a settings ile.
Transfer the ile to the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
The software of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will check the formal integrity of the ile you uploaded.
If the uploaded ile contains, for example, syntax errors or unknown settings, the complete ile will be rejected and the settings of the instrument will remain unchanged.
In other words: you cannot damage the FLIR identiFINDER R300 by uploading a wrong or corrupt ile. You can, however, upload a ile with settings making no sense for your ield of application.
196 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
If the settings ile contains data for settings not supported on your FLIR identiFINDER R300, the setting will be accepted but is obviously meaningless.
You will be informed about success or failure after the upload.
Reset Factory Settings
Discard all changes you made to any of the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s settings and reestablish the settings made at the factory.
The password (see 2.2.7
, p.
46 ), if any, is reset to the factory setting as well.
8.10 Bulk Download (Web Page)
Data (p.
ä
Bulk Download
This web page lets you download all or a selection of the data saved in your FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database to your computer (Figure 209 , p.
198 ). The records matching certain criteria will be wrapped into a
*.zip
archive and downloaded.
Date Selection
Limit the records to be downloaded by their saving date (in ISO 8601 notation).
A pop-up calendar helps you to enter the dates.
Several buttons are available to enter common date combinations (
Today
,
Last Week
, etc.).
Start Date […]
The date of the oldest record to be downloaded. Leave this ield empty to get the oldest record available in the database of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
End Date […]
The date of the youngest record to be downloaded. Leave this ield empty to get the youngest record available in the database of the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Data Types
Limit the records to be downloaded by their type.
The actual collection of available types depends on the variant of your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
4
Identi cations
Include identi ication results in the archive.
4
Spectra
Include spectra in the archive.
4
…
Include other data types in the archive.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 197
8.10. Bulk Download (Web Page) FLIR Detection
Figure 209.
Bulk download web page
After you have checked a box, the number of records matching the data selection criteria is shown.
Download
Initiate the download.
The name of the downloaded
*.zip
archive begins with the serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 followed by the type of contents, for example
103156000000 Bulk Download.zip
Depending on the con iguration of your web browser, the archive will be downloaded to your standard download folder or your browser will ask you to name a destination folder and a ile name.
The downloaded archive contains folders for every data type. These folders contain folders for the available ile formats of that type. The actual data iles have the same names as if they were downloaded individually.
198 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
22
23
24
25
26
27
18
19
20
21
28
29
30
31
32
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
7
8
9
5
6
3
4
1 103156000000 Bulk Download:
2 Alarms:
Alarms.txt
Identifications:
ANSI N42.42 2006:
Identification 1002.ANSI N42.42 2006.n42
Identification 1003.ANSI N42.42 2006.n42
ANSI N42.42 2012:
Identification 1002.ANSI N42.42 2012.n42
Identification 1003.ANSI N42.42 2012.n42
spc:
Identification 1002.Measurement.spc
Identification 1003.Measurement.spc
spe:
Identification 1002.Measurement.spe
Identification 1003.Measurement.spe
Screenshots:
IdentifyScreen_D20121227_T224932+00_00.png
DoseRateScreen_D20121227_T224900+00_00.png
Spectra:
ANSI N42.42 2006:
Spectrum 1010.ANSI N42.42 2006.n42
Spectrum 1014.ANSI N42.42 2006.n42
ANSI N42.42 2012:
Spectrum 1010.ANSI N42.42 2012.n42
Spectrum 1014.ANSI N42.42 2012.n42
spc:
Spectrum 1010.Measurement.spc
Spectrum 1014.Measurement.spc
spe:
Spectrum 1010.Measurement.spe
Spectrum 1014.Measurement.spe
8.11
Identi cations (Web Page)
Data (p.
ä
Identi cations
This web page (Figure 210 , p.
200 ) tabulates the identi ication results stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database (For the navigation of tables refer to section 2.4.2
, p.
55 ).
The table shows several columns for every record:
The arbitrary reference number of the record.
The date and time of storage of the record.
The trigger of the identi ication measurement.
Manual
You saved the measurement manually (see 4.3
, p.
90 ).
Auto
The measurement was triggered by the automated mode (see 4.4
, p.
93 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 199
8.11. Identi cations (Web Page) FLIR Detection variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 210.
Table of identi ication result records
Neutron Alarm
©
Shows whether a neutron alarm was raised during the measurement this identi ication result is based upon.
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Show
Open a page showing details (see 8.11.1
, p.
200 ) of the record.
8.11.1
Identi cation Details (Web Page)
Details of a single record are shown on an individual page (Figure 211 , p.
201 ) which you can open from the table of records (Figure 210 , p.
200 ) by clicking
Show
.
For the navigation of records and other common elements of record pages refer to section 2.4.3
, p.
56 .
200 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 211.
Details of an identi ication result record
To download the shown record, click
Download and follow the directions given by your web browser.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 201
8.12. Spectra (Web Page) FLIR Detection
The name of the downloaded
*.zip
archive begins with the serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 followed by the type and the reference number of the record, for example
103156000000 Identification 4711.zip
The downloaded archive contains iles in several formats. The ile names comprise the type of data and the reference number of the record.
Identification 4711.ANSI N42.42 2006.n42
An XML ile according to ANSI N42.42 2006 (p.
) containing instrument information, the identi ication result, and the measured spectrum.
Identification 4711.ANSI N42.42 2012.n42
An XML ile according to ANSI N42.42 2012 (p.
) containing instrument information, the identi ication result, and the measured spectrum.
Identification 4711.Measurement.spc
A text ile containing instrument information, the identi ication result and the measured spectrum.
Identification 4711.Measurement.spe
A text ile containing instrument information, the identi ication result and the measured spectrum.
8.12
Spectra (Web Page)
Data (p.
ä
Spectra
This web page (Figure 212 , p.
203 ) tabulates the spectra stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database (For the navigation of tables refer to section 2.4.2
, p.
55 ).
The table shows several columns for every record:
Nº
The arbitrary reference number of the record.
Start Time
The beginning of data acquisition of the spectrum.
Saved on
The date and time of storage of the record.
Real Time
The real time of data acquisition of the spectrum.
Show
Open a page showing details (see 8.12.1
, p.
203 ) of the record.
202 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Figure 212.
Table of spectrum records
8.12.1
Spectrum Details (Web Page)
Details of a single record are shown on an individual page (Figure 213 , p.
205 ) which you can open from the table of records (Figure 212 , p.
203 ) by clicking
Show
.
For the navigation of records and other common elements of record pages refer to section 2.4.3
, p.
56 .
To download the shown record, click
Download and follow the directions given by your web browser.
The name of the downloaded
*.zip
archive begins with the serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 followed by the type and the reference number of the record, for example
103156000000 Spectrum 4711.zip
The downloaded archive contains iles in several formats. The ile names comprise the type of data and the reference number of the record.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 203
8.12. Spectra (Web Page) FLIR Detection
Spectrum 4711.ANSI N42.42 2006.n42
An XML ile according to ANSI N42.42 2006 (p.
) containing instrument information and the measured spectrum.
Spectrum 4711.ANSI N42.42 2012.n42
An XML ile according to ANSI N42.42 2012 (p.
) containing instrument information and the measured spectrum.
Spectrum 4711.Measurement.spc
A text ile containing instrument information and the measured spectrum.
Spectrum 4711.Measurement.spe
A text ile containing instrument information and the measured spectrum.
204 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 213.
Details of a spectrum record
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 205
8.13. Alarms (Web Page) FLIR Detection
8.13
Alarms (Web Page)
Data (p.
ä
Alarms
This web page (Figure
206 ) tabulates the alarms and warnings stored in the FLIR
identiFINDER R300’s database (For the navigation of tables refer to section 2.4.2
, p.
55 ).
..
Figure 214.
Table of alarm records
The table shows several columns for every record:
The arbitrary reference number of the record.
The date and time the alarm was raised.
The duration of the alarm. If the instrument was switched off during the alarm, the duration is not given.
206 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Type
The type of alarm or warning.
Value
The quantity which increased above the alarm threshold.
Show
Open a page showing details (see 8.13.1
, p.
207 ) of the record.
8.13.1
Alarm Details (Web Page)
Details of a single record are shown on an individual page (Figure 215 , p.
207 ) which you can open from the table of records (Figure
, p.
Show
.
For the navigation of records and other common elements of record pages refer to section 2.4.3
, p.
56 .
Figure 215.
Details of an alarm record
8.14
Screenshots (Web Page)
Data (p.
ä
Screenshots
This web page (Figure
, p.
) lists the screenshots saved in the database of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (see 2.2.8
, p.
49 , cf 7.2
, p.
170 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 207
8.15. Live Screen (Web Page) FLIR Detection
..
Figure 216.
Table of screenshots
After you hold the pointer over the name of a screenshot ile for a moment, the screenshot will appear in an overlay.
To download a screenshot ile to your computer, click its name and follow the directions given by your web browser.
8.15
Live Screen (Web Page)
Live Screen
This web page re lects the screen of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Figure 217 , p.
209 ). The image is updated every 2 seconds.
You can operate your FLIR identiFINDER R300 with the instrument keyboard (see 2.2
, p.
32 ) or by clicking the buttons in the web page image.
208 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Figure 217.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300’s screen live in the web interface
Be patient when clicking or pressing buttons. Your actions are recognized but the image is refreshed only every other second.
8.16
Live Spectrum (Web Page)
Live Spectrum
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Spectrum (p.
106 )
The main feature of this web page (Figure 218 , p.
210 ) is the live spectrum chart.
The live spectrum shown here is independent from the spectrum you can view on the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (see 6.2
, p.
106 ).
Buttons above the chart provide commands to acquire and manage spectra, buttons below the chart in luence the display of the data.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 209
8.16. Live Spectrum (Web Page) FLIR Detection
210
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 218.
Empty live spectrum page
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
Starts the acquisition of data.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 interrupts other operations during the acquisition. You will be noti ied on the instrument’s screen (see
The spectrum chart and the information shown below the chart are updated every second
(Figure 219 , p.
213 ).
The current spectrum is not cleared before recording data, that is, new measurements are added to the existing spectrum. To record a pristine spectrum, use the command irst (see below).
The acquisition of spectrum data does not stop if you navigate to another web page or even disconnect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 from the computer. The acquisition of spectrum data stops in one of the following events:
• You end the acquisition with
.
.
.
• You end the acquisition on the instrument with (see
).
We recommend to stop data acquisition before you exit the live spectrum to relieve the
FLIR identiFINDER R300 from processing spectrum data.
Stops the acquisition of data.
Clears the spectrum.
This command clears the current spectrum but does not stop the current acquisition of data, if any.
Applies the identi ication algorithm to the current spectrum. The result is shown above the chart (Figure 220 , p.
214 ).
The identi ication result is stored in the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s database. The reference numbers of identi ication results saved during this live spectrum session are shown in a section below the chart.
Saves the current spectrum into the database of the FLIR identiFINDER R300. The reference numbers of spectra saved during this live spectrum session are shown in a section below the chart.
...
.
.
Switches to logarithmic scaling along the vertical axis of the spectrum chart.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 211
8.16. Live Spectrum (Web Page) FLIR Detection
...
.
...
.
.
Switches to linear scaling (the default) along the vertical axis of the spectrum chart.
Switches to square root scaling along the vertical axis of the spectrum chart.
212 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
!!Acquisition Status
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 219.
Live spectrum page during data acquisition
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 213
8.16. Live Spectrum (Web Page) FLIR Detection
214
Available only for variants equipped with a neutron detector.
Figure 220.
Identi ication results of a live spectrum
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
8.17
Software Update (Web Page)
Administration (p.
ä
Software Update
This web page (Figure
, p.
215 ) lets you load iles onto your FLIR identiFINDER R300 for soft-
ware updates. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 will recognize the uploaded ile and process it as described in B.2
, p.
255 .
..
Figure 221.
File upload web page
Specify the ile to be uploaded.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Enter the path to the ile.
Use your computer’s standard method to choose a ile.
.
.
Upload the ile to the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
8.18
Password (Web Page)
Administration (p.
ä
Password
You can change the administrator password (see 2.4.6
, p.
60 ) on this web page (Figure 222 , p.
216 ).
Enter the current password for the given user and the new password twice.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 215
8.19. System Files (Web Page) FLIR Detection
Figure 222.
Web page to change the administrator password
Save
Transfer your changes to the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
8.19
System Files (Web Page)
Administration (p.
ä
System Files
This web page (Figure
) lets you download or delete log iles from your FLIR identiFINDER R300. These logs are created in certain circumstances and might help our service and support personnel to identify problems.
Available Files
This section (Figure
, p.
) lists the available iles.
The collection of available iles depends on the history of your instrument. Not all of the iles shown in Figure
, p.
are always available on all instruments.
Delete
Delete the listed system ile from the FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Download
Download the listed system ile to your computer.
216 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 8. Using the FLIR identiFINDER R300 Web Server
..
Figure 223.
System iles web page
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 217
FLIR Detection 9. Sending Data to a Remote Server
Chapter 9
Sending Data to a Remote Server
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can transfer data via the Internet to a remote server for further processing like reachback analysis, archival or whatever process is implemented on the server, see
Figure 224 , p.
219 for a possible scenario.
R E M O T E S E R V E R
ANSI N42.42 Data
*.n42
File process archive forward
Database process
Formatted Reports
(
,
*.html
, …),
*.spc
Spectra Files,
Charts, Summaries
HTTP POST
I N T E R N E T
Browse
Figure 224.
A possible scenario for remote handling of FLIR identiFINDER R300 data
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 219
9.1. Internet Connection FLIR Detection
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 uploads data in a ile formatted according to ANSI N42.42
2006 (p.
) via a standard HTTP POST command, so all a server has to do is to process this ile.
You can develop your own server software (ask us (see B.4
, p.
257 ) for the technical details and a reference example) or have us build server software tailored to your needs.
The HTTP URI (e.g.
http://n42.example.com/reachback
) of the remote server running the software to accept and handle the data sent by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 has to be stored in the instrument’s settings under
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
)
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
ä
Remote Server Settings (p.
149 )
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity (p.
ä
Remote Server (p.
)
The protocol (
http
) is part of the URI, that is, you can change it to
https
for secure transfer if required.
https
connections require a trusted SSL certi icate on the server.
Protocols other than
http
or
https
are not supported.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 will transfer data to this address with a
HTTP POST
command using these parameters:
serialnumber
The serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300
reachbackfile
The ANSI N42.42-formatted data ile
To check the ile contents locally, you can download a ile with the same contents via the web interface (see
).
To verify proper reception of the data sent, the instrument checks for a success message (a
X-
ReachbackSuccess
HTTP header) or an error message (a
X-ReachbackError
HTTP header with the error message as the header’s value).
In case of an error, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 shows this message on the screen.
9.1
Internet Connection
You can connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to the Internet via a computer already connected (see
) or by tethering your cell phone to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Figure 225 , p.
221 ), which is possible if
• your cell phone supports Dial-Up Networking (DUN) via Bluetooth,
220 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 9. Sending Data to a Remote Server
Server
Internet
Cell Phone with Dial-Up
Networking Support
Computer connected to the Internet
FLIR identiFINDER R300
Figure 225.
Connection for uploading FLIR identiFINDER R300 data to a remote server
• your phone carrier provides the necessary infrastructure and data plan.
To set up the connection you need the correct credentials and access information provided by your
cell phone carrier, in particular
User Name
The user name and
Password
the password for the dial up connection. Both can be omitted with some carriers which use other means for authentication, for example your SIM card.
Connection String
Settings specifying the connection, for example
+CGDCONT=1,”IP”,”web.example.com”
.
Phone Number
The number for data connections, for example
*99***1#
.
Ô
To con gure your FLIR identiFINDER R300 for sending data to a remote server…
These steps are required once for a given combination of cell phone carrier and remote server.
1. Collect the required setup information (see above) from your cell phone carrier or your IT administrator.
2. Enter the setup information into the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (see 6.24
, p.
149 )
3. Enter the operator’s (your) name and voice phone in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (see 6.27
, p.
153 ) so they can be included in reports to be sent.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 221
9.1. Internet Connection FLIR Detection
Entering these values is much more convenient via the web interface (see
, p.
).
Ô
To prepare for sending data…
These steps are required before actually sending data for the irst time after you switch on your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
1. Place you cell phone in the vicinity of your FLIR identiFINDER R300.
2. Pair your cell phone with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (see 6.23.3
, p.
144 ).
All the settings mentioned above are necessary to send data to a remote server. If any item is missing, you will be prompted to enter it when you actually want to send data.
222 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 10. Connecting via Satellite Phone
Chapter 10
Connecting via Satellite Phone
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can also transmit data using a Bluetooth™ DUN connection with a satellite phone. In order to utilize this method of transport, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 must be paired to a Bluetooth-to-Serial converter that is connected to the satellite phone and con igured to properly connect to the phone and a reachback server.
10.1
Pairing the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Satellite Phone
Currently, the Iridium™ 9505A satellite phone with Iridium data adapter and Parani SD1000
Bluetooth-to-Serial adapter have been veri ied with the FLIR identiFINDER R300 but other satellite phones and adapters may also work. Contact our service department for more information.
Ô
To pair with the satellite phone…
1. Connect the Parani SD1000 Bluetooth-to-Serial adapter connected to the Iridium 9505A satellite phone.
2. Using a pin, press and hold the adapter’s recessed Pairing button for two seconds then release.
While the LED is lashing in a triple lash pattern, the adapter is discoverable.
3. Place the device in the vicinity of the FLIR identiFINDER R300. The maximum range is 10 m
(33 ft) but could be less depending on the environment.
4. From Dose Rate mode on the FLIR identiFINDER R300, press the right button to access the
Options menu then navigate to Bluetooth Periphery and select it:
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
)
ä
Bluetooth Periphery
Note: If the ”SPP Enabled” screen appears then you must irst disable Bluetooth SPP mode at:
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
ä
Bluetooth SPP (p.
)
ä
Bluetooth SPP Status (p.
141 )
ä
Bluetooth SPP
Settings
Once Bluetooth SPP is disabled (if necessary), return to Bluetooth Periphery using the irst part of this step before continuing.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 223
10.1. Pairing the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Satellite Phone FLIR Detection
5. If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 has not yet been paired with any Bluetooth device, it will begin the search immediately so continue to the next step. If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 has previously been paired with another device, then the Bluetooth device selection screen will appear (Figure 226 , p.
224 ). Select
Change device then select
Search from the next screen
(Figure 227 , p.
224 ) to initiate a search for discoverable Bluetooth devices.
Figure 226.
Select ”Change Device” if an unwanted device is paired
224
Figure 227.
”Prepare your Bluetooth devices…” appears after selecting ”Change device”
6. Wait a few moments while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 searches for Bluetooth devices supporting the required protocol (Figure 228 , p.
224 ).
Figure 228.
Searching for Bluetooth devices
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 10. Connecting via Satellite Phone
If the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is unable to detect any compatible Bluetooth devices it will report ”Search Failed” (Figure 228 , p.
224 ). Ensure the SD1000 LED is still lashing in a triple lash pattern and that the devices are within the maximum range. If the devices are more than a few meters apart then move them closer, if possible. Select
Search to restart the search for discoverable Bluetooth devices and repeat this step.
Figure 229.
No Bluetooth devices detected
7. Once the Search completes with at least one compatible Bluetooth device selected it will report the identi ication screen of all detected devices (Figure 230 , p.
225 ). Choose the
SD1000… device from the list (Figure 230 , p.
225 ) with
Down then press
Select to pair.
The device names are listed exactly as received from the detected devices and the name of the SD1000 may differ from what is shown in the screenshot.
Figure 230.
Detected SD1000 device entry chosen
8. Choose the
Choose 1234
PIN option (Figure 231 , p.
226 ) then press
Select to pair.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 225
10.1. Pairing the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a Satellite Phone FLIR Detection
Figure 231.
Selecting a PIN for the pairing of Bluetooth devices
9. An information screen (Figure 232 , p.
226 ) will be shown for a short time while pairing is in progress.
Figure 232.
Bluetooth Periphery Information: Pairing is in progress...
If pairing fails then an error message (Figure 233 , p.
226 ) will be displayed. Make sure the satellite phone and SD1000 are powered on, correctly con igured, and still within range of the FLIR identiFINDER R300, then try again.
Figure 233.
Pairing to a Bluetooth device failed
10. After a successful pairing, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will display information about the paired Bluetooth device in the Device Details screen (Figure 234 , p.
227 ). Verify that the
FLIR identiFINDER R300 has established the Connection as ”Dial-Up Network” as shown in
226 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 10. Connecting via Satellite Phone
this screen then select
Exit
. The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is now connected to the satellite phone via the paired SD1000.
Figure 234.
The Device Details indicates successfull pairing
Keep the satellite phone (and SD1000) and the FLIR identiFINDER R300 within 10 m (33 ft) of each other during use. In some environments, the devices may need to be kept even closer than this limit to maintain the pairing.
10.2
Con guring Remote Server Settings for the Satellite Phone
Although the previous section connected the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to the satellite phone, settings must still be established for accessing the satellite phone and the reachback server. These settings are in the Remote Server Settings and may be established on the instrument directly (see
6.24
, p.
149 ) or, more ef iciently, through the web interface (see
).
Options Menu (p.
ä
More Options (p.
)
ä
Advanced Options (p.
)
ä
Connectivity Options (p.
ä
Remote Server Settings (p.
149 )
Settings (p.
ä
Connectivity (p.
ä
Remote Server (p.
)
User Name:
directinternet
Password:
directinternet
Connection String:
Connection string for satellite phone service provider
Phone Number:
DUN Access Number for the satellite phone (from the service provider)
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 227
10.2. Con guring Remote Server Settings for the Satellite Phone FLIR Detection
URI (web address) of a reachback server
The protocol (
http
) is part of the URI, that is, you can change it to
https
for secure transfer if required.
https
connections require a trusted SSL certi icate on the server.
Protocols other than
http
or
https
are not supported.
228 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 11. Powering the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Chapter 11
Powering the FLIR identiFINDER R300
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 comes with a rechargeable battery as internal power source which can be replaced only by our service ( B.4
, p.
257 ).
11.1 External Power Sources
You can connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to external power sources via the Mini-USB-B connector (Figure 5 , p.
26 ), for example to a
• wall mounted power supply (use the Mini-USB-B to USB-A cable included with the FLIR identiFINDER R300, Figure
• USB port of a computer (use the Mini-USB-B to USB-A cable included with the FLIR identiFINDER R300, Figure
• car adapter (use the Mini-USB-B to USB-A cable included with the FLIR identiFINDER R300,
Figure
, p.
)
Please refer to section
, p.
for information about plugging and unplugging cables.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 draws a current of approximately 400 mA. Before connecting to a computer, please make sure the USB outlet of the computer complies with this requirement.
This might not be the case with some laptops, netbooks or similar battery powered devices.
While the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is connected to an external power source, the green LED (Figure 5 , p.
26 ) is on. You can run the instrument from external power and charge the batteries.
Compared to a USB power source, charging the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is a lot faster when you use the power supply of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 because it supplies a much higher current than a host conforming to the USB standard.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 229
11.2. Charging the FLIR identiFINDER R300 FLIR Detection
11.1.1
Wall Mounted Power Supply
The power supply can handle common international AC voltages and frequencies. It features a swappable adaptor for various international receptacles (Figure 235 , p.
230 , Figure 236 , p.
230 )
Press Here
Figure 235.
Power Supply: Removing the international adapter
Figure 236.
Power Supply: Attaching an international adapter
11.2
Charging the FLIR identiFINDER R300
You can charge the built-in battery by connecting the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to an external power source.
230 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 11. Powering the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Ô
To charge the batteries in the FLIR identiFINDER R300…
1. Use the power supply to connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a wall outlet or equivalent power source.
or
Use the auto adapter to connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to an appropriate power source.
or
Connect the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a computer.
Charging is a lot faster when you use the power supply of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 because it supplies a much higher current than a host conforming to the USB standard.
2. Observe the power indicator (see 2.1
, p.
29 ) if the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is running while charging.
11.2.1
Charging Durations
Shortest charging durations are achieved with
• the FLIR identiFINDER R300 switched off and
• the FLIR identiFINDER R300 connected to the wall mounted power supply shipped with the
FLIR identiFINDER R300.
Under these conditions, charging takes about 3 hours.
We recommend leaving the power supply connected for a longer time, for example over night, if circumstances allow.
Charging the batteries will take longer, if
• the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is switched on, or
• the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is powered by a USB-connected computer because the power supply of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 supplies a much higher current than a host conforming to the USB standard.
If the batteries are completely discharged, we recommend to charge them while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is switched off. Wait at least 15 min after connecting the power adapter before you switch on the instrument.
When reliable batteries with higher capacity become available, we will build them into our products. This will increase the run time and also the charging duration.
11.3
Battery Power Saving Tips
In order to prolong the runtime of the FLIR identiFINDER R300’s batteries, you can avoid certain operations or optimize some settings for reduced power consumption.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 231
11.3. Battery Power Saving Tips FLIR Detection
This section lists those features of your FLIR identiFINDER R300 that need a lot of energy but might not be necessary all the time or for all ields of application.
The list begins with the more energy-demanding features and proceeds to the frugal ones.
Backlight Brightness and Timeout
The backlight of the screen draws a signi icant amount of power. Reduce the backlight brightness (see 6.9
, p.
122 ) to what you really need in your environment.
Let the backlight time out after the shortest period of inactivity (see 6.9
, p.
122 ) convenient for your work low.
A status icon on the screen keeps you posted about the current energy saving options
(see 2.1
, p.
30 ).
GPS Receiver
Switch off the GPS receiver (see 6.11
, p.
127 ) if you don’t need coordinates to be saved with, for example, identi ication results or spectra.
Switch off the GPS receiver while you work at places with poor or no GPS reception (inside buildings, in mines, etc.).
Communication via Bluetooth
Send data to remote servers (see 9 , p.
219 ) only when necessary.
The Bluetooth hardware draws power only while you communicate with remote servers.
You don’t have to explicitly switch it off.
Finder Mode
Return to the Dose Rate Mode from the Finder Mode when you don’t need it anymore (see
).
Spectrum Acquisition
Stop the data acquisition for spectra (see 6.2
, p.
106 ) when you don’t need it anymore.
Other functions draw extra power as well, but are irrelevant in this context. The web server, for example, is active only while the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is connected to an external power source anyway.
232 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 12. Accessories for the FLIR identiFINDER R300
Chapter 12
Accessories for the FLIR identiFINDER R300
This chapter gives an overview of the various accessories available for the FLIR identiFINDER R300; some are included with certain variants, others are sold separately.
12.1 Source Set
The source set (sold separately) is a collection of radiation sources for calibration, testing or training purposes.
..
Figure 237.
Source set (sold separately)
Source sets are available in the variants shown in the table below, each set comprising 8 plastic disks containing radionuclides bonded as chloride.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 233
12.1. Source Set FLIR Detection
RSS8
1
2
133
Ba
152
Eu
3
7
8
4
5
6
Mix
Nuclide Activity [Bq] Peaks of Interest [MeV]
3
4
5
6
7
137
Cs
22
Na
54
Mn
57
Co
60
Co
109
Cd
8
RSS8EOD3
1
133
Ba
2
152
Eu
3
4
5
6
7
137
Cs
22
Na
54
Mn
57
Co
60
Co
109
Cd
8
RSS8EOD4
1
133
Ba
2
152
Eu
137
Cs
22
Na
54
Mn
57
Co
60
Co
137
Cs
65
Zn
RSS8EOD2
1
133
Ba
2
152
Eu
37000
37000
0.963 1.082 1.109 1.408
37000 0.662
37000 0.511 1.275
37000 0.835
37000 0.122 0.136
37000 1.173 1.333
18500 0.662
37000 0.511 1.115
37000
37000
0.081 0.276 0.303 0.356 0.384
37000 0.121 0.244 0.344 0.562 0.826
0.963 1.082 1.109 1.408
9250 0.662
37000 0.511 1.275
37000 0.835
37000 0.122 0.136
37000 1.173 1.333
37000
37000
37000 0.121 0.244 0.344 0.562 0.826
0.963 1.082 1.109 1.408
3700 0.662
37000 0.511 1.275
37000 0.835
37000 0.122 0.136
37000 1.173 1.333
37000
0.081 0.276 0.303 0.356 0.384
0.121 0.244 0.344 0.562 0.826
0.088
0.081 0.276 0.303 0.356 0.384
0.088
0.081 0.276 0.303 0.356 0.384
37000 0.121 0.244 0.344 0.562 0.826
0.963 1.082 1.109 1.408
to be continued…
234 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection 12. Accessories for the FLIR identiFINDER R300
… continuation
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
Nuclide Activity [Bq] Peaks of Interest [MeV]
137
Cs 3700 0.662
22
Na
54
Mn
57
Co
60
Co
109
Cd
37000
37000
37000
37000
37000
0.511 1.275
0.835
0.122 0.136
1.173 1.333
0.088
8
RSS8EOD5
1
133
Ba
2
152
Eu
8
137
60
109
Cs
22
Na
54
Mn
57
Co
Co
Cd
37000 0.081 0.276 0.303 0.356 0.384
18500 0.121 0.244 0.344 0.562 0.826
0.963 1.082 1.109 1.408
3700 0.662
18500 0.511 1.275
37000 0.835
37000 0.122 0.136
18500 1.173 1.333
37000 0.088
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 235
FLIR Detection A. Info Pool
Appendix A
Info Pool
A.1
identiFINDER R 300: Speci cations
Several variants of this product are available.
A
..
identiFINDER R 300 nanoRaider Z
Cadmium zinc telluride (CdZnTe) detector
B
..
identiFINDER R 300 nanoRaider ZH
Cadmium zinc telluride (CdZnTe) detector;
3
He tube
Speci ications relevant for certain variants only are labeled with the variant.
Detectors
Gamma: CdZnTe
Neutrons:
B
..
GPS
3
He Proportional Counter Tube
Three crystals; 15 mm (0.59 in) × 13 mm
(0.51 in) × 5 mm (0.20 in); ±5 %
15 mm (0.59 in) × 54 mm (2.13 in); net: 14 mm
(0.55 in) × 29 mm (1.14 in); 8 atm (8.106 bar)
66-channel MediaTek MT3329 receiver; sensitivity >-165 dBm
Performance
Energy Range (Gamma); Dose Rate Channel 51 keV – 3 MeV
Energy Range (Gamma); Identi ication
Channel
30 keV – 3 MeV
Throughput; Dose Rate Channel
Throughput; Identi ication Channel
Sensitivity (
137
Cs); Identi ication Channel
Sensitivity (
137
Cs); Dose Rate Channel
Gamma Spectrum
≤250 kcps
≤180 kcps
≥0.47 cps per 10 nSv/h
≥0.81 cps per 10 nSv/h
1024 channels; 3 MeV
to be continued…
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 237
A.1. identiFINDER R 300: Speci cations
… continuation
Dose Rate Range
Dose Rate Accuracy (
137
Cs)
Overload Threshold
Neutron Sensitivity
Nuclide Identi ication
Typical Resolution
Service
Recommended Interval
Physical
Dimensions (W × D × H)
Weight
Weight
Housing Material
Environmental
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Temperature Change
Relative Humidity
Shock Resistance
Protection Rating
Battery
Type
Capacity
Battery Life
Charging Duration
Operating Duration
Display
Type
FLIR Detection
B
..
≤100 nSv/h – 10 mSv/h (≤10 μrem/h –
1.0 rem/h);
±30 %
5 mSv/h
2.6 cps/nv; ±20 %
According to ANSI N42.48
≤3.5 % FWHM at 662 keV at 25 °C (77 °F) ambient temperature
5 a
A
..
B
..
70.3 mm (2.77 in) × 33.8 mm (1.33 in) ×
125.5 mm (4.94 in)
340 g (11.99 oz)
370 g (13.05 oz)
Aluminium
-20 °C – +50 °C (-4 °F – +122 °F)
+10 °C – +35 °C (+50 °F – +95 °F)
Temperature change must not exceed 8.4 °C
(15.1 °F)/min
10 % – 93 %, non condensing
According to ANSI N42.48-2008
IP63 according to IEC 60529
Internal (Li-ion, single cell, rechargeable)
1950 mAh; 3.7 V; 25 °C (77 °F)
300 – 500 full charge-discharge cycles; 3 a – 5 a
≤3 h at 25 °C (77 °F) when instrument off and connected to AC power charger and >5.5 h when powered via USB.
≥24 h at 25 °C (77 °F) in dose rate mode with dimmed display back light and GPS switched off
Trans lective color LCD
to be continued…
238 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection
… continuation
Size
Central Luminance
Annunciators
Blue LED
Red LED
Green LED
Vibrator
Beeper
Memory
Data Storage Capacity
Identi ications incl. Spectrum
Screenshots
Alarms
Input, Output
USB
Bluetooth
Software
Embedded Software
Web Interface
IPv4
IPv6
Download File Formats
Reachback
Accessories
DC Power Adapter, Charger
Car Power Adapter, Charger
Connection Cable
Holster
Carrying Case
A. Info Pool
55.88 mm (2.20 in); 320 pixel × 240 pixel
400 cd/m
2 typically
B
..
Neutron detection and alarm
Gamma alarm
Power status
Alarm reporting
Alarm reporting
2 GB internal memory; 1800 MB available for the user
≈600000
≈2500
≈1000000
USB 2.0; mini-B socket
≤50 m (164.04 ft) range
Microsoft Windows CE Operating System
TCP/IP emulated via USB
DHCP server included; subnet con igurable
ULA routing pre ix fde6:e89e:44bc::/48 with device speci ic subnet
ANSI N42.42 and spc iles compatible with third-party analysis software applications such as GADRAS, Cambio, or PeakEasy
ANSI N42.42 data via HTTP
AC in: 100 V – 230 V; 50 Hz – 60 Hz; DC out: 5 V;
2 A
DC in: 12 V – 24 V; DC out: 5 V; 2 A
Mini USB-B – USB-A; 1.83 m (6.00 ft)
60 g (2.12 oz)
Included
to be continued…
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 239
A.1. identiFINDER R 300: Speci cations
… continuation
Standards
ANSI N42.48
IEC 60529
EMC - Directive 2004/108/EC
FCC Part 15
ANSI N42.42 2006
FLIR Detection
Performance Requirements for Spectroscopic
Personal Radiation Detectors (SPRDs) for
Homeland Security
Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures
(IP Code)
Regulations concerning electromagnetic compatibility
Regulations concerning electromagnetic compatibility
Data format standard for radiation detectors used for Homeland Security
240 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection
A.2
Detector Positions
Detector Crystals ( )
A. Info Pool
Optional
3
He Tube (Neutrons)
Figure 238.
Position of the detector centers of the FLIR identiFINDER R300
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 241
A.3. Optimum Illumination of Detector Crystals
A.3
Optimum Illumination of Detector Crystals
Source
15 15 cm cm
(6 in)
(6 in)
Detector Crystals ( )
FLIR Detection
Figure 239.
Optimal dose rate calculation needs a uniform illumination of the three detector crystals, for which the source to detector distance should be at least 15 cm (6 in) (drawn to scale).
242 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection A. Info Pool
A.4
Unmanned Neutron Detection
For unmanned measurements involving un-moderated neutron sources, a 30 cm × 30 cm ×
15 cm PMMA phantom (Figure
243 ) or equivalent must be placed between the source
and the detector in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 (Figure 238 , p.
241 ) in order to provide adequate moderation of fast neutrons and to simulate ield operation instructions in section
3.2.2
, p.
71 .
..
Figure 240.
Recommended setup for unmanned measurements of fast neutrons
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 243
A.5. Certi cates
A.5
Certi cates
A.5.1 FLIR identiFINDER R300: Manufacturer’s declaration of conformity (CE)
FLIR Detection
..
244 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection A. Info Pool
A.6
Bluetooth Serial Port Pro le (SPP) Communication Overview
While the FLIR identiFINDER R300 has Bluetooth Serial Port Pro ile (SPP) enabled (see 6.23.1
, p.
141 ) and is connected to a compatible device it will respond to properly formatted queries and can also stream data. This allows integrators to design custom interfaces and for operators to use such interfaces to either listen for or inquire about current instrument status. The following is a description of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 SPP data format.
The following does not apply to Bluetooth Periphery mode and only applies to Bluetooth SPP mode.
A.6.1 Bluetooth Device Name and PIN
A unique Bluetooth device name for each FLIR identiFINDER R300 is set during manufacture and can be provided upon request. Each FLIR identiFINDER R300 will also have a unique PIN (see
6.23.1
, p.
141 ) made up of 16 characters selected from lower-case English alphabet characters (a-z) and numerals (0-9).
A.6.2 Data Format
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 is capable of responding to commands from a device connected via a Bluetooth SPP connection. In addition, the FLIR identiFINDER R300 can be con igured to stream data in response to an environmental or user trigger. The commands and triggers are explained in the following sections.
A.6.3 Conventions and Usage Notes
The format of the commands and responses make up a complete and well-formatted XML document, including the XML declaration. The character encoding of these messages shall be UTF-8 and shall not include a byte order marker (BOM).
The
NUL
character is represented in this document’s example listings in C-style notation as
\0
. It is a single standard byte with the character value of zero.
For the purposes of this speci ication, any number of
NUL
(
\0
) bytes contained within the XML message is illegal, since
NUL
is used as the message delimiter after the completed XML. Every message shall be terminated with the
NUL
character.
XML tags are case sensitive.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 245
A.6. Bluetooth Serial Port Pro le (SPP) Communication Overview FLIR Detection
Only one command should be sent before receiving a response. If no response is received after 15 seconds, it can be assumed the command was lost or the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is in an unresponsive state.
The example listings use colored text and other font effects for emphasis. This is not part of the XML message. Line breaks and indentation are also for ease of reading and are not required.
The XML messages make extensive use of AttributeName=AttributeValue pairs. Each Attribute-
Name in the de ined messages is ixed and will be shown verbatim in the example listings.
However, there is typically more than one possible value for an AttributeValue. Listings will sometimes show placeholder text for an AttributeValue in blue similar to: (PlaceholderText) . In actual usage, placeholder text will be replaced with the appropriate text or numerical value.
When a literal value is used in an example instead of placeholder text, it will be shown in red text such as in this attribute pair:
encoding=
”utf-8”
(See Listing A.1
). However, keep in mind that the literal value shown may be only one of several possible values for that AttributeValue. In many cases, other possible values will be enumerated in the description after the listing.
A.6.4 General Command Format
Command messages are sent to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 and will be of the general format shown in Listing A.1
:
Listing A.1.
General Command Format
1
2
3
4
5
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< C o m m a n d n a m e = ” (CommandName) ” >
< A r g u m e n t n a m e = ” (ArgName) ” v a l u e = ” (ArgValue) ” / >
…
< / C o m m a n d > \0
Line 1: XML Declaration
The XML declaration is the same for all messages and should be verbatim as shown on Line
1.
Line 2: Command element
A command message will contain one
Command
element as the root element. How a command message will be parsed and what (if any)
Argument
child elements will be expected and interpreted are determined by the
name
attribute of the
Command
element, shown in the example with the (CommandName) placeholder value.
246 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection A. Info Pool
Lined 3: Argument element(s)
A command message may contain zero, one or multiple
Argument
elements as children to the root element. Any
Argument
elements will each have two attribute speci ications in the form of attribute name, attribute value pairs.
ArgName
Each
Argument
element will have a
name
attribute, shown in the example with the
(ArgName) placeholder value.
ArgValue
Each
Argument
element will also have a
value
attribute, shown in the example with the (ArgValue) placeholder value.
Line 4
The ellipsis in this example are not part of the actual message and serve to indicate additional
Argument
elements may be allowed for a command.
Line 5
The root
Command
element is closed, completing the XML portion of the message.
The message is then terminated with the
NUL
character at the end of line 5. This is not part of the XML speci ication, but is required by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a message delimiter.
A.6.5
General Update Format
Update messages are sent from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a response to a command or triggered by an event or user setting and will be of the following general format:
Listing A.2.
General Update Format
1
2
3
4
5
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< U p d a t e n a m e = ” (CommandName) ” t y p e = ”nanoRaider” id = ” (SerialNumber) ” >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” (PropertyName) ” v a l u e = ” (PropertyValue) ” u n i t s = ” (PropertyUnits) ” / >
…
< / U p d a t e > \0
Line 1: XML Declaration
The XML declaration is the same for all messages.
Line 2: Update element
The message will will contain one
Update
element as the root element.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 247
A.6. Bluetooth Serial Port Pro le (SPP) Communication Overview FLIR Detection name type id
What
Property
child elements will be present are determined by the
name
attribute, shown in the example with the (CommandName) placeholder value. Update messages will contain the same (CommandName) as the command message they are in response to.
The
type
attribute indicates the device class sending the message. For the FLIR identiFINDER R300 this will be
”nanoRaider”
.
The
id
attribute, shown in the example with the (SerialNumber) placeholder, will contain the unique serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 sending the message.
The
id
attribute value may contain non-numerical characters. For example, the serial number may contain a dash.
Line 3
An Update message may contain zero, one or multiple
Property
elements as children to the root element.
Property
elements will normally have have two or three attribute speci ications in the form of attribute name, attribute value pairs.
name
Each
Property
element will have a
name
attribute, shown in the example with the
(PropertyName) placeholder value.
value
Each
Property
element will also have a
value
attribute, shown in the example with the (PropertyValue) placeholder value.
units
Some
Property
elements will also have a
units
attribute, shown in the example with the (PropertyUnits) placeholder value.
Line 4
The ellipsis in this example are not part of the actual message and serve to indicate additional
Argument
elements may be allowed for an Update message.
Line 5
The root
Update
element is closed, completing the XML portion of the message.
The message is then terminated with the
NUL
character at the end of line 5. This is not part of the XML speci ication, but is required by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a message delimiter.
A.6.6 General Error Format
Error messages sent from the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will be of the following general format:
Listing A.3.
General Error Format
1
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
248 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection A. Info Pool
2
< E r r o r n a m e = ” (CommandName) ” t y p e = ”nanoRaider” id = ” (SerialNumber) ” d e s c r i p t i o n = ” (ErrorDescription) ” / > \0
Line 1: XML Declaration
The XML declaration is the same for all messages.
Line 2: Error element
The message will will contain one
Error
element as the root element.
name type
An error message will contain the same (CommandName) present in the command message it is in response to. This is true even if the (CommandName) was invalid.
This may also be
”(unknown)”
if the FLIR identiFINDER R300 was unable to parse a command element from the XML message.
The
type
attribute indicates the device class sending the message. For the FLIR identiFINDER R300 this will be
”nanoRaider”
.
description
The
description
attribute, shown in the example with the (ErrorDescription) placeholder, will contain a brief textual description of the error condition and/or cause. The following are examples of some actual error descriptions:
”Unknown command.”
”Malformed XML message received.”
”Spectra id 416 does not exist.”
A.7
SPP Commands and Updates
A.7.1 Ping
The Ping command will generate a Ping update from the FLIR identiFINDER R300. This can be used to verify SPP communication is functional and to determine the device serial number.
Listing A.4.
Ping Command
1
2
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< C o m m a n d n a m e = ” P i n g ” / > \0
The Ping command should be verbatim as shown in the listing.
Listing A.5.
Ping Update
1
2
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< U p d a t e n a m e = ” P i n g ” t y p e = ”nanoRaider” id = ” (SerialNumber) ” / > \0
*
Test footnote.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 249
A.7. SPP Commands and Updates FLIR Detection
Line 1: XML Declaration
The XML declaration is the same for all messages.
Line 2: Update element
The message will will contain one
Update
element as the root element.
name type
A Ping update will always report
”Ping””
as the
name
attribute.
The
type
attribute indicates the device class sending the message. For the FLIR identiFINDER R300 this will be
”nanoRaider”
.
The root
Update
element is closed, completing the XML portion of the message.
The message is then terminated with the
NUL
character at the end of line 2. This is not part of the XML speci ication, but is required by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 as a message delimiter.
A.7.2 Status
A Status update message can be queried through the command speci ied below or is periodically transmitted during the presence of a radiation or low battery alarm.
Listing A.6.
Status Command
1
2
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< C o m m a n d n a m e = ” S t a t u s ” / > \0
Listing A.7.
Example Status Update
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< U p d a t e n a m e = ” S t a t u s ” t y p e = ”nanoRaider” id = ” (SerialNumber) ” >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” B a t t e r y L e v e l ” v a l u e = ” 53 ” u n i t s = ” pct ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” S t a b i l i z a t i o n ” v a l u e = ” t r u e ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” G M M o d e ” v a l u e = ” t r u e ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” D o s e R a t e ” v a l u e = ” 10 ” u n i t s = ” µ r e m / h ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” C o u n t s ” v a l u e = ” 100 ” u n i t s = ” c o u n t s ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” N e u t r o n R a t e ” v a l u e = ” 10 ” u n i t s = ” cps ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” O p e r a t i n g M o d e ” v a l u e = ” F i n d e r ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” D o s e R a t e W a r n i n g T h r e s ” v a l u e = ” 27 ” u n i t s = ” µ r e m / h ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” D o s e R a t e A l a r m T h r e s ” v a l u e = ” 2 0 0 0 0 ” u n i t s = ” µ r e m / h ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” D o s e W a r n i n g T h r e s ” v a l u e = ” 27 ” u n i t s = ” m r e m ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” D o s e A l a r m T h r e s ” v a l u e = ” 2 0 0 0 0 ” u n i t s = ” m r e m ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” N e u t r o n R a t e W a r n i n g T h r e s ” v a l u e = ” 27 ” u n i t s = ” cps ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” N e u t r o n R a t e A l a r m T h r e s ” v a l u e = ” 2 0 0 0 0 ” u n i t s = ” cps ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” G P S V a l i d ” v a l u e = ” t r u e ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” L o n g i t u d e ” v a l u e = ” - 8 4 . 2 6 2 5 ” u n i t s = ” deg ” / >
250 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection A. Info Pool
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” L a t i t u d e ” v a l u e = ” 3 6 . 0 1 3 3 3 3 ” u n i t s = ” deg ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” L a s t S p e c t r u m N u m b e r ” v a l u e = ” 53 ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” B a t t e r y L o w ” v a l u e = ” f a l s e ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” O v e r l o a d ” v a l u e = ” f a l s e ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” A l a r m ” v a l u e = ” f a l s e ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” D o s e R a t e W a r n i n g ” v a l u e = ” f a l s e ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” D o s e R a t e A l a r m ” v a l u e = ” f a l s e ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” D o s e A l a r m ” v a l u e = ” f a l s e ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” N e u t r o n C o u n t R a t e W a r n i n g ” v a l u e = ” f a l s e ” / > =
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” N e u t r o n C o u n t R a t e A l a r m ” v a l u e = ” f a l s e ” / >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” S i g m a G a m m a A l a r m ” v a l u e = ” f a l s e ” / >
29
30
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” S i g m a N e u t r o n A l a r m ” v a l u e = ” f a l s e ” / >
< / U p d a t e > \0
Property Elements
As shown, there are multiple
Property
elements in a Status update.
name
For reliability and future compatibility, a parser should not rely on the order of the
Property
elements but should parse the
name
attribute of each
Property
element.
value
For each
Property
element in a status update, the
value
attribute will be either textual or numerical. Many of those elements with a textual
value
attribute indicate a boolean state with the value being either
”true”
or
”false”
.
units
A
units
attribute will be included when necessary to interpret a numerical
value
attributes. Only some
Property
elements have units.
Line 2:
The (SerialNumber) placeholder in the example will be replaced with the unique serial number of the FLIR identiFINDER R300 sending the message.
Stabilization (Line 4):
Stabilization is only available on models without LED stabilization.
Dose and Dose Rate units
Any dose
units
will be in either rem or Sievert (Sv) scaled units as required by the FLIR identiFINDER R300 settings (see 6.31
, p.
159 ). The speci ied base unit for some properties will be dynamically scaled according to the property
value
while others are statically scaled in the FLIR identiFINDER R300 settings.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 251
A.7. SPP Commands and Updates FLIR Detection
Dose units (Lines 12 and 13)
DoseWarningThres
and
DoseAlarmThres
use dose units. The possible scaled rem units are
”rem”
,
”mrem”
,
”µrem”
, and
”nrem”
. The possible scaled Sievert units are
”Sv”
,
”mSv”
,
”µSv”
, and
”nSv”
.
Dose rate units (Lines 6, 10 and 11):
DoseRate
,
DoseRateWarningThres
, and
DoseRateAlarmThres
use dose rate units. The possible scaled rem per hour units are
”rem/h”
,
”mrem/h”
,
”µrem/h”
, and
”nrem/h”
. The possible scaled Sieverts per hour units are
”Sv/h”
,
”mSv/h”
,
”µSv/h”
, and
”nSv/h”
.
Operating Mode (Line 9):
OperatingMode
indicates the current mode the FLIR identiFINDER R300 is operating in. Possible values include:
”DoseRate”
,
”Finder”
,
”Identify”
, or
”Other”
.
Neutron Information (Lines 14, 15, 26, 27, and 29):
NeutronRateWarningThres
,
NeutronRateAlarmThres
,
NeutronCountRateWarning
,
NeutronCountRateAlarm
, and
SigmaNeutronAlarm
are only available on instruments that contain an He-3 tube.
Sigma Alarms (Lines 28 and 29):
Sigma alarms are currently available only on R300 products.
A.7.3 Get Spectra
The ”GetSpectra” information can be queried through the command speci ied below or is automatically transmitted upon selection of ”send” on the user interface of the device.
Listing A.8.
GetSpectra Command
1
2
3
4
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< C o m m a n d n a m e = ” G e t S p e c t r a ” >
< A r g u m e n t n a m e = ” N u m b e r ” v a l u e = ” (SpectrumNumber) ” / >
< / C o m m a n d > \0
Line3: Spectrum Number
If the GetSpectra command has an
Argument
element then it must contain a
name
attribute with a value of
”Number”
and a
value
attribute with a numerical value specifying the record number of the spectrum to send.
Omit the
Argument
element to retrieve highest spectrum number.
Listing A.9.
GetSpectra Update
1
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
252 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection A. Info Pool
2
3
4
< U p d a t e n a m e = ” G e t S p e c t r a ” t y p e = ”nanoRaider” id = ” (SerialNumber) ” >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” S p e c t r a ” v a l u e = ” (base64 encoded n42 file) ” / >
< / U p d a t e > \0
Line 3: Spectra
The GetSpectra update will contain a base64 encoded string which can be decoded into an
ANSI N42.42 2006 (p.
) ile of the requested spectra. The encoded data is represented in the example listing with the (base64 encoded n42 ile) placeholder. Base64 decoding is outside the scope of this document.
All commands and updates below this point provide properties that are already contained in the Status update message. These are to be used if additional granularity is required.
A.7.4 Counts
Listing A.10.
Counts Command
1
2
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< C o m m a n d n a m e = ” C o u n t s ” / > \0
Listing A.11.
Counts Update
1
2
3
4
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< U p d a t e n a m e = ” C o u n t s ” t y p e = ”nanoRaider” id = ” (SerialNumber) ” >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” C o u n t s ” v a l u e = ” 100 ” u n i t s = ” c o u n t s ” / >
< / U p d a t e > \0
A.7.5 Dose Rate
Listing A.12.
DoseRate Command
1
2
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< C o m m a n d n a m e = ” D o s e R a t e ” / > \0
Listing A.13.
DoseRate Update
1
2
3
4
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< U p d a t e n a m e = ” D o s e R a t e ” t y p e = ”nanoRaider” id = ” (SerialNumber) ” >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” D o s e R a t e ” v a l u e = ” 10 ” u n i t s = ” µ r e m / h ” / >
< / U p d a t e > \0
A.7.6 Neutron Rate
Neutron properties are only available on instruments that contain an He-3 tube.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 253
A.7. SPP Commands and Updates FLIR Detection
Listing A.14.
NeutronRate Command
1
2
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< C o m m a n d n a m e = ” N e u t r o n R a t e ” / > \0
Listing A.15.
NeutronRate Update
1
2
3
4
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< U p d a t e n a m e = ” N e u t r o n R a t e ” t y p e = ”nanoRaider” id = ” (SerialNumber) ” >
< P r o p e r t y n a m e = ” N e u t r o n R a t e ” v a l u e = ” 10 ” u n i t s = ” cps ” / >
< / U p d a t e > \0
A.7.7 Serial Number
Listing A.16.
SerialNumber Command
1
2
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< C o m m a n d n a m e = ” S e r i a l N u m b e r ” / > \0
Listing A.17.
SerialNumber Update
1
2
< ? xml v e r s i o n = ” 1.0 ” e n c o d i n g = ” utf -8 ” ? >
< U p d a t e n a m e = ” S e r i a l N u m b e r ” t y p e = ”nanoRaider” id = ” (SerialNumber) ” / > \0
A.7.8 Other Commands and Updates
Other command and update implementations can be considered upon request. Please feel free to contact FLIR Detection with any questions or comments.
254 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection B. Maintenance
Appendix B
Maintenance
B.1
Field Maintenance
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 requires neither ield maintenance nor ield calibration. Under no circumstances should any part of the housing be penetrated or removed.
If necessary, clean the instrument with a dry lint-free cloth.
After certain service intervals (see
) you should send the FLIR identiFINDER R300 to a service organization (see B.4
, p.
257 ) for preventive maintenance and performance optimization.
B.2
Software Installation
Software like irmware or application updates can be uploaded to the FLIR identiFINDER R300 via the administration page of the web server (see
).
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 accepts uploaded iles only with correct digital signature.
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 displays a message after it received a ile (Figure 241 , p.
256 ). Press
Ignore to discard the ile or
Install to install it.
The display keeps you posted about the processing of the ile and the FLIR identiFINDER R300 will restart after the successful installation.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 255
B.3. Storage FLIR Detection
Figure 241.
After uploading a software package
B.3
Storage
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 should be stored in a dry and clean location. If possible, it should be stored at room temperature.
256 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection B. Maintenance
B.4
After Sales Service and Support
Please keep the serial number and the version information (Figure 3 , p.
23 , Figure 138 , p.
131 ) ready when contacting our customer support.
FLIR Detection has service centers throughout the world. To locate your local service center please refer to the website ( detectionsupport.com/radiation/ ).
FLIR Detection, Inc.
100 Midland Road
Oak Ridge, TN 37830
USA
T + 1.865.220.8700
v + 1.865.220.7181
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 257
FLIR Detection C. Nuclide Library
Appendix C
Nuclide Library
The FLIR identiFINDER R300 can identify and report some special radiation sources and a number of radionuclides as listed in this appendix.
The usage and severity association given in the table represents the factory defaults. You can adapt the association of nuclides with usage ( 6.6
, p.
119 ) and severity ( 6.7
, p.
120 ) to your particular demands.
The table is sorted by element names and lists the following properties of radiation sources.
• Nuclide name in standard notation
•
Nuclide name
in simpli ied notation
• Half life
• Severity
I
S
T
• Usage
Innocent
Suspicious
Threatening
NORM: Naturally occurring radioactive material
MED: Medically used material
IND: Industrially used material
SNM: Special nuclear material
NUC: Former name for SNM
• Remarks on occurrence or application
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 259
C. Nuclide Library FLIR Detection
Annihilation
Background
Neutrons
Unknown
Americium
241
95
Am
Am-241
Annihilation Radiation
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Annihilation radiation is released by the electron-positron extermination caused by the beta+ decay. It has a ixed energy of 511 keV and is caused by all beta+ radiators. Common examples are
18
F (used for medical applications) or
22
Na which also emits gamma radiation.
I
.
.
Naturally occurring radioactive material
The ubiquitous background radiation is emitted from a variety of mostly natural and some arti icial sources such as unstable nuclides contained in most chemical elements comprising the lithosphere, biosphere, and atmosphere; cosmic radiation from outer space; and applications of nuclear technology for weapons, power plants and medicine. The background recorded by an instrument is, of course, spoiled by non-natural sources present while measuring the background.
T
.
.
Special nuclear material
Neutron radiation can have different origins, the most common types are spontaneous ission sources (e. g.
252
Cf) and alpha emitters packaged in a low-Z elemental matrix (e. g. Americium-Beryllium,
Americium-Lithium or Plutonium-Beryllium). Both types have a wide range of applications, including industrial and medical ields. Neutrons can also occur in the vicinity of nuclear power plants driven by neutrons that collide with the ission material, typically using one of the above sources.
S
..
Unknown nuclear material
An unknown source of radiation. Further investigations are necessary.
433 a
T
.
.
Industrially used material
Most commonly used in smoke detectors and to measure levels of toxic lead in paint samples. Also used to ensure uniform thickness in rolling processes like steel and paper production. May be combined with beryllium or lithium to produce a neutron source.
to be continued…
260 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection C. Nuclide Library
… continuation
Barium
133
56
Ba
Ba-133
Bismuth
207
83
Bi
Bi-207
Cadmium
109
48
Cd
Cd-109
Cesium
134
55
Cs
Cs-134
137
55
Cs
Cs-137
Chromium
51
24
Cr
Cr-51
Cobalt
57
27
Co
Co-57
10.75 a
.
.
I
Industrially used material
Used in nuclear medicine for patient attenuation correction during an imaging technique (i.e. S.P.E.C.T. imaging) for yielding 3D information of the patient’s internal organs, etc.
38 a
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Principle use is for research and may be found as a by-product of proton reactions with lead.
463 d
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Used to analyze metal alloys when checking stock and also sorting scrap.
2.07 a
30.07 a
.
.
I
Industrially used material
Used as a tracer for radiation leaks. This nuclide is a ission product in nuclear reactors. It can occur in the radioactive fall-out resulting from hazardous incidents in nuclear power plants.
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Used as radiotracers to measure and control the liquid low in oil pipelines and to tell researchers whether oil wells are plugged by sand. Utilized in density and ill height sensors to ensure the correct ill level for food, drugs and other products. This nuclide is a ission product in nuclear reactors. It can occur in the radioactive fall-out resulting from hazardous incidents in nuclear power plants.
27 d 17 h
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Used in research in red blood cell survival studies.
272 d
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Included in medical in-vitro diagnostic kits, it is commonly used as a radiological “marker” to estimate organ size.
to be continued…
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 261
C. Nuclide Library FLIR Detection
Iodine
123
53
I
I-123
125
53
I
I-125
… continuation
60
27
Co
Co-60
Europium
152
63
Eu
Eu-152
Gallium
67
31
Ga
Ga-67
Holmium
166m
67
Ho
Ho-166m
Indium
111
49
In
In-111
131
53
I
I-131
5.3 a
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Used to sterilize surgical instruments and to improve the safety and reliability of industrial fuel oil burners. Also used in cancer treatment, food irradiation, industrial gauges and radiography.
13.5 a
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Used in nuclear reactor control rods. In some countries this nuclide has been substituted in place of
60
Co for radiation therapy.
3 d 6 h
I
.
.
Medically used material
Used to pinpoint infections and tumors. Also used in PET scans for studying the brain and the heart functions.
1200 a
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Used in physics experiments and research and can also be used in nuclear control rods used in reactors.
2 d 19 h
I
.
.
Medically used material
Used for special diagnostic studies, e.g. brain studies, infection and colon transit studies.
13 h
60 d
8 d
I
.
.
Medically used material
Used to diagnose thyroid function/dysfunction. Also used in PET scans for studying the brain and the heart functions.
I
.
.
Medically used material
Used in a medical procedure for detecting hormone levels in the blood. Used for cancer treatment of the brain and prostate. It is also used to diagnose deep vein blood clots in the leg, and certain kinds of kidney maladies.
I
.
.
Medically used material
Used for therapy such as imaging the thyroid and treating its related cancers. Also used to diagnose abnormal liver function, kidney blood low and urinary tract obstruction. This nuclide is a ission product in nuclear reactors. It can occur in the radioactive fall-out resulting from hazardous incidents in nuclear power plants.
to be continued…
262 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection C. Nuclide Library
… continuation
Iridium
192
77
Ir
Ir-192
.
.
I
Industrially used material
Temporarily implanted in wire form for use as an internal radiotherapy source in cancer treatment. Also used to test the integrity of pipeline welds, boilers and aircraft parts.
Manganese
54
25
Mn
Mn-54
312 d
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Used to study and predict the behavior of heavy metal pollutants within the out low of waste water from mining operations.
Molybdenum
99
42
Mo
Mo-99
2 d 18 h
Neptunium
237
93
Np
Np-237
2.14 Ma
Plutonium
mix
94
Pu 6561 a; 24100 a
Plutonium
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Used for generating
99m
Tc.
T
.
.
Special nuclear material
No major commerical uses except in the production of
238
Pu.
T
.
.
Special nuclear material
A mixture of
240
Pu and
239
Pu in various concentrations. Mixtures with low
240
Pu concentration are used to build most nuclear ission weapons, bombs, and warheads.
Potassium
40
19
K
K-40
74 d
1.277 Ga
I
.
.
Naturally occurring radioactive material
There are no speci ic commercial or medical uses for this isotope of potassium, but it is occurring naturally. Typical concentrations found in food deliver 140 μSv/a–180 μSv/a. Higher
40
K concentrations can present a considerable cancer inducing risk.
Radium
226
88
Ra
Ra-226
1600 a
I
.
.
Naturally occurring radioactive material
A decay product of uranium and thorium, it occurs in virtually all rock, soil, and water in low concentrations. 20 % of the
226
Ra that is ingested via food and water is deposited into the bone. Although this makes the nuclide dangerous itself, it presents its greatest risk when it decays into
222
Ra, which is an odorless, tasteless, radioactive gas that can be inhaled into the lungs.
to be continued…
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 263
C. Nuclide Library FLIR Detection
… continuation
Samarium
153
62
Sm
Sm-153
Selenium
75
34
Se
Se-75
Silver
110m
47
Ag
Ag-110m
Sodium
22
11
Na
Na-22
47 h
.
.
I
Industrially used material
Pharmaceutically marketed as “Quadramet”, it is used for relieving pain caused by secondary cancers within the bone. Also used for treating prostate and breast cancer.
120 d
I
.
.
Industrially used material
In the form of seleno-methionine this nuclide is used to investigate enzyme production in the digestive tract.
249 d 19 h
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Used as a radiotracer for biological and industrial research.
Technetium
99m
43
Tc
Tc-99m
2.6 a
I
.
.
Industrially used material
Used to study the sodium-potassium exchange-dynamic of nerve axons within the nervous systems of living organisms. Also used to locate leaks in industrial pipe lines and in oil well studies.
6 h 1 m
.
.
I
Medically used material
Used for imaging the heart muscle, lungs, brain, and the skeletal system. Other uses include imaging the kidney, liver, thyroid, spleen, gall bladder, salivary and lacrimal glands, and the heart blood pool. It is also used to investigate other medical issues, like certain types of infections. Also used for tracing sewage and liquid waste movements within city infrastructures. This nuclide is a ission product in nuclear reactors. It can occur in the radioactive fall-out resulting from hazardous incidents in nuclear power plants.
Thallium
201
81
Tl
Tl-201
3 d 1 h
I
.
.
Medically used material
Used for diagnosing coronary artery disease and other heart problems.
to be continued…
264 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection C. Nuclide Library
… continuation
Thorium
232
90
Th
Th-232/U-232
14.05 Ga
232
Th or
232
U
I
.
.
Naturally occurring radioactive material
Found naturally occurring in abundance within the earth crust, it is not issile itself, but can be used to generate the issile element
233
U.
232
Th is used in gas lantern mantles and WIG welding rods. The spectra of
232
Th and
232
U are very similar.
Uranium
232
92
U
U-232/Th-232
233
92
U
U-233
235
92
U
U-235
68.9 a
160 ka
704 Ma
238
92
U
U-238
4.468 Ga mix
92
U 704 Ma; 4.468 Ga
Uranium
232
U or
232
Th
T
.
.
Special nuclear material
The spectra of
232
Th and
232
U are very similar.
T
.
.
Special nuclear material
Used in nuclear power generators.
Although the United States demonstrated/detonated in 1955 a
233
U based bomb core, the use of
233
U within a weapon is not as viable of a choice for a weapon when compared to
235
U.
T
.
.
Special nuclear material
Can be effectively used to manufacture a nuclear ission weapon, and is a primary concern because the design complexity required is far less than that required for a
239
Pu based weapon.
T
.
.
Special nuclear material
Used as a base material for generating
239
Pu.
T
.
.
Special nuclear material
A mixture of
238
U and
235
U in various concentrations from depleted to highly enriched
235
U. Can be effectively used to manufacture a nuclear ission weapon, and is a primary concern because the design complexity required is far less than that required for a
239
Pu based weapon.
Xenon
133
54
Xe
Xe-133
5 d 6 h
I
.
.
Medically used material
133
Xe is used for blood low measurements and to image the heart, lungs, and brain, for example, by means of tomography.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 265
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
Appendix D
Glossary
This glossary lists terms, units, and abbreviations used throughout this document and provides a brief explanation. For detailed information consult a textbook or an encyclopedia.
12-Hour Clock
A historic convention in which the 24 hours of the day are split into two halves called ante
meridiem (a.m., “before mid day”) and post meridiem (p.m., “after mid day”). Each half comprises 12 hours numbered: 12 (acting as zero), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11. (see Table
, p.
Ú
Table 3.
The 12- and 24-hour clock notation.
12-Hour Clock 24-hour Clock midnight (begin of day) 12:00 a.m.
00:00
12:01 a.m.
00:01
12:59 a.m.
00:59
1:00 a.m.
01:00
2:00 a.m.
02:00
⋯ ⋯
11:00 a.m.
11:00
11:59 a.m.
11:59 noon 12:00 p.m.
12:00
12:01 p.m.
12:01
12:59 p.m.
12:59
1:00 p.m.
13:00
2:00 p.m.
14:00
⋯ ⋯
11:00 p.m.
23:00
11:59 p.m.
23:59 midnight (end of day) 00:00 (of next day)
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 267
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
24-Hour Clock
The
8601 convention of time keeping dividing the day running from midnight to midnight into 24 hours. The notation indicates the hours passed since midnight from 0 to 23. (cf
Ú
A
Also known as: Army Time, Military Time, Astronomical Time, Radio Time, Railway Time,
Continental Time
Ú
𝛼
Particle
Ú
𝛼
Radiation
Ú
Absorbed Dose
The amount of energy deposited in matter by
Ú
given in
to the
, the absorbed dose does not differentiate the biological effects of the ionizing radiation.
Acrylic Glass
Ú
Activity
The number of disintegrations of an excited state in a
per duration given in
Ú
Activity Concentration
Ú
Adjustment
Ú
Alarm
An audible, visual, or other signal activated when an instrument reading or response exceeds a preset value or falls outside of a preset range.
Alpha Particle
Two
and two
Ú
Neutrons , strongly bound together. It is the
of the helium atom
4
2
He. Alpha (𝛼) particles are commonly emitted during the
Ú
of heavy
Ú
Also known as: 𝛼 Particle
Alpha Radiation
A
of
Ú
. Alpha radiation has a short range in matter, due to its positive charge and heavy mass, being relatively easy to shield, for example by a sheet of paper (Figure 245 , p.
283 ). However, it poses a great health hazard when alpha radiators are ingested by organisms.
268 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
Also known as: 𝛼 Radiation
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
An organization that oversees the development of voluntary consensus standards for products, services, processes, systems, and personnel in the USA.
ANSI
Ú
American National Standards Institute
ANSI N42.42
An
XML -based data format standard for radiation detectors used for homeland security.
Sometimes a version is speci ied with the year of release, for example, ANSI N42.42 2006.
ANSI N42.42 formatted iles can be processed and analyzed with third-party software including, for example, applications provided by public institutions such as Cambio and GADRAS
(Sandia National Laboratories, USA,
http://www.sandia.gov
), or PeakEasy (Los Alamos
National Laboratory, USA,
http://www.lanl.gov
).
Also known as: N42
Army Time
Ú
Astronomical Time
Ú
Atom
The basic unit of matter consisting of a
Ú
surrounded by a cloud of
Ú
Atomic Mass
The mass of a speci ic
Ú
Isotope , sum of the masses of all
Ú
,
Ú
Neutrons (
Ú
), and
.
Atomic Mass Number
Ú
Atomic Number (Z)
The number of
in the
of an
Also known as: Proton Number 𝛽
Particle
Ú
𝛽
Radiation
Ú
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 269
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
Background Radiation
The ubiquitous radiation in the environment, emitted from a variety of mostly natural and a few man-made sources. Natural sources are terrestrial (
Ú
of
Ú
like or
235
U
232
Th abundant in the Earth crust) or cosmic (high-energy
originating primarily from the Sun interact with the upper Earth atmosphere creating a shower of secondary radiation).
Becquerel (Bq)
The becquerel is the
Ú
derived unit of radioactivity. One Bq is de ined as the
of a quantity of radioactive material in which one
Ú
decays per second. (
)
1 Bq =
1 s
Beta Particle
High-energy, high-speed
(𝛽 ) or
Ú
(𝛽 ) emitted as
Ú
.
The
Ú
of
Ú
Neutrons to
Ú
emits beta particles and antineutrinos.
Also known as: 𝛽 Particle
Beta Radiation
A
of
. Beta Radiation can usually be shielded by a sheet of metal, for example, Al foil (Figure 245 , p.
283 ). Beta radiation ionizes the surface of organisms and can lead to severe burns with long-term sequelae like skin cancer.
Also known as: 𝛽 Radiation
Bluetooth
A standardized open wireless technology for data communication over short distances using radio waves.
Bq
Ú
(C
2
H
4
) n
Ú
(C
5
H
8
O
2
) n
Ú
Cadmium Zinc Telluride (CZT, CdZnTe)
An alloy of cadmium telluride and zinc telluride, a substance to build
Semiconductor Radiation Detectors
usable at room temperature.
Calibration
A de ined procedure for the comparison of the reading of an instrument to the value conventionally accepted as correct (a “standard”).
270 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
In less strict use of the term, calibration is regarded as including the adjustment of the reading of the instrument to agree with the standard, within a speci ied accuracy.
Also known as: Adjustment
CBRNE
Acronym for chemical, biological, radiological, nuclear, and explosive. It refers to incidents or weapons presenting any of these hazards.
CdZnTe
Ú
Cesium Lithium Yttrium Chloride (CLYC, Cs
2
LiYCl
6
:Ce)
Substance to build
usable for gamma spectroscopy and the detection of thermal
Ú
Neutrons .
Chemical Element
Ú
CLYC
Ú
Cesium Lithium Yttrium Chloride
CONOPS, CONOPs, ConOps
A Concept of Operations is a document describing the characteristics of a system from the viewpoint of an individual user of that system. CONOPS are widely used in the US military or government services.
Continental Time
Ú
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
A time standard based on International Atomic Time. Time zones are speci ied as positive or negative offsets from UTC.
Count
A single detected event registered by a detection system.
Cs
2
LiYCl
6
:Ce
Ú
Cesium Lithium Yttrium Chloride
Curie
The curie is an older, non-
Ú
unit of radioactivity. (
1 Ci = 3.7 × 10 Bq; 1 Bq = 2.70 × 10 Ci
CZT
Ú
Dead Time (DT)
The dead time of a detection system is the time after each event during which the system is busy and hence is not able to record another event if it happens. An everyday analogon is the time you have to wait after taking a photo with lash to recharge the lash for the next photo.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 271
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
Decay
The process by which an unstable
(parent) loses energy by emitting
Ú
and transforming to another nuclide (daughter). Decay of a single nuclide is spontaneous, that is, it neither needs external triggering nor is it predictable. The average decay rate of a large number of nuclides, however, is predictable and usually given as
Also known as: Disintegration, Radioactive Decay
Deutsches Institut für Normung (DIN)
The German national organization for standardization, represents Germany in the
Ú
.
DHS
Department of Homeland Security (USA)
Dial-Up Networking (DUN)
A
communications pro ile to access the Internet or other dial-up services.
DIN
Ú
Deutsches Institut für Normung
Dirty Bomb
Ú
Radiological Dispersion Device
Disintegration
Ú
DNDO
Domestic Nuclear Detection Of ice of the
(USA)
Dose
A measure of the
Ú
energy transfer to, for example, tissue (
Ú
Dose Rate
The quotient of
given in
Ú
and time.
DT
DUN
Ú
Ú
Electromagnetic Radiation
Self-propagating waves comprising electric and magnetic ield components. The
ranges from low-frequent radio waves (longer waves), microwaves, visible light, ultraviolet radiation, X-rays up to high-frequent
Ú
Gamma Radiation (shorter waves).
Electron
A subatomic particle with a negative electric charge, counterpart of the
. It is emitted as
Electron Volt (eV)
The electron volt is a non-
Ú
unit of energy (
) employed in radiation physics. It is equal to the amount of kinetic energy gained by a single unbound electron when it accelerates through an electrostatic potential difference of one volt.
1 eV ≈ 1.602177 × 10 J
272 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
Element
Pure substance consisting of
having the same number of
(also known as
Ú
) sharing the same chemical properties. The nuclear properties differ if the number of
Ú
Neutrons varies in the nuclides (
Ú
Also known as: Chemical Element
Equivalent Dose
A measure of the radiation
Ú
absorbed by tissue where an attempt has been made to consider the different relative biological effects of different types of
The equivalent dose is calculated by weighting the
with a factor selected for the type and energy of the radiation. The weighting factor ranges from 1 for
Ú
Gamma Radiation and
to higher values for
Ú
, and
Ú
Neutrons .
eV
Ú
Extensible Markup Language
Ú
False Alarm
An
Ú
not caused by a radioactive source under the speci ied background conditions.
False Alarm Rate (FAR)
The number of
per duration.
FAR
Ú
Fast Neutron
Ú
Neutron Temperature
FGPu
Ú
Fission
An exothermic nuclear process in which a
Ú
is usually absorbing a
Ú
Neutron and two ission fragments and a few ission neutrons emerge.
Also known as: Nuclear Fission
Fuel-Grade Plutonium (FGPu)
A mixture of
239
Pu,
240
Pu and other
, which contains between 7 % and 19 %
Further grades are
and
Ú
.
240
Pu.
Full Width at Half Maximum (FWHM)
The full width at half maximum height of a
Ú
in a
Ú
(Figure 242 , p.
274 ).
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 273
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
( )
FWHM
Figure 242.
Full width at half maximum height of a peak
Fusion
An exothermic nuclear process in which two or more light
are con ined together forming a heavier nucleus. The magnetic con inement is usually realized in plasma devices as e.g. a Tokamak or a Stellarator. A Tokamak is a toroidal chamber surrounded by magnetic coils. It can be seen as a huge current transformator, which produces enough potential to ignite a plasma inside the chamber. Contrary to the symmetric appearance of a Tokamak, a
Stellarator has a non-symmetric, highly complex ield and chamber design.
Also known as: Nuclear Fusion
FWHM
Ú
𝛾
Radiation
Ú
Gamma Radiation
Gamma Radiation
Gamma (𝛾) radiation is energetic (typically >100 keV)
of high frequency (typically >10 Hz) and very short wavelength (typically <10 m).
Gamma radiation originating from
Ú
typically carries energies from a few hundred keV to about 10 MeV and is
Ú
Gamma radiation penetrates deeply and is dif icult to stop. It can be stopped by a suf iciently thick layer of material with high
Ú
, such as
82
Pb (lead, Figure 245 , p.
283 ).
Also known as: 𝛾 Radiation
Gamma Ray Detection
Gamma rays can be detected by observing their interaction with matter. Some materials emit visible light when hit by gamma rays (
Ú
Scintillator ), some gases are ionized and conduct
electricity (
Ú
Geiger–Müller Tube ), or some semiconductors (
Detector ) change electric conductivity when exposed to gamma radiation.
Ge
Ú
274 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
Geiger–Müller Tube (GM Tube)
A device to detect
Ú
consisting of a tube illed with low-pressure noble and halogene gas in a strong electric ield. Incident radiation produces
which can be measured as electric current between the electrodes.
Germanium (Ge)
A substance used in high-precision
Semiconductor Radiation Detectors
for
Ú
Gamma Radiation .
Global Positioning System (GPS)
A constellation of satellites sending microwave signals which enable receivers to determine the time, their location, speed, and direction.
Also known as: Navstar Global Positioning System
GM Tube
Ú
GMT
Ú
GPS
Ú
Gray (Gy)
The gray is the
derived unit of
due to
Ú
. One gray is the absorption of one joule of energy, in the form of ionizing radiation, by one kilogram of matter.
J
1 Gy = 1 kg
= 1 m s
For
Ú
Gamma Radiation , these are the same base units as the
Ú
do no not use J/kg but always Gy for the absorbed dose and Sv for the
Ú
.
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
Originally the mean solar time at the Royal Observatory in Greenwich, London. It is commonly but imprecisely used synonymously with
when referring to time zones.
Gy
Ú
Half Life
The duration it takes for a substance undergoing
to decrease by half.
HAZMAT, Hazmat, HazMat
Hazardous materials and items, dangerous goods.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 275
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
3
He Detector
A device to detect thermal
Ú
Neutrons (
Ú
Neutron Detection ) consisting of a tube illed with
3
He and other gases under high pressure in a strong electric ield. Incident neutrons react with the helium yielding an electrical charge in the gas which can be detected similar as in a
Ú
.
HPGe
High-Purity
Ú
HPRDS
Human Portable Radiation Detection System
HTTP
Ú
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
A networking protocol for distributed, collaborative, hypermedia information systems, essential for data communication in the World Wide Web.
IANA
Ú
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
International Organization for Standardization
Ú
International System of Units
Ú
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA)
An organization responsible for the allocation of globally-unique names and numbers that are used in Internet protocols.
Internet Protocol (IP)
A protocol used for data communication between devices in a network.
Intrinsic Activity
The inner
of a radiation instrument, without contribution from the environment or other sources.
Ion
A
whose number of
Ú
differs from the number of
Ú
resulting in a net negative or positive electric charge.
Ionizing Radiation
Ú
or
Ú
energetic enough to detach
from atoms or molecules, thus converting them to
Ú
276 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
Ionization depends on the energy of radiation, not on the number of particles or the wavelength. Roughly speaking, particles or photons with energies above a few
are ionizing.
..
Figure 243.
Ionizing radiation warning symbol (ISO 21482)
IP
Ionizing Radiation can cause serious damage when absorbed by living tissue, and is therefore a health hazard.
Ú
IP Address
A unique numerical label that is assigned to devices participating in an
Ú
based computer network. Usually it is a 32-bit number written in four 8-bit bytes, for example
192.168.10.199
. It is used to identify hosts or network interfaces and to address locations.
IrOBEX
Ú
ISO (International Organization for Standardization)
The world’s largest developer and publisher of International Standards. ISO is a network of the national standards institutes of countries around the world.
Isobar
Different
Ú
having the same
Ú
40
18
Ar and
72
34
Se.
40
19
K or
72
36
Kr and
Isomer
An excited state in a
Ú
having a very long
compared to other excited states: at least a µs or ms. Some isomers expose a much longer half life so they are called metastable
(m), for example
99m
Tc with a half life of about 6 h.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 277
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
Isotone
Different
having the same number of
Ú
Neutrons , for example
40
20
Ca with 20 neutrons each but a different
Ú
.
36
16
S,
38
18
Ar,
39
19
K, and
Isotope
Different
having the same number of
(also known as
) belonging to the same chemical
, for example
234
92
U,
235
92
U and
238
92
U.
J
Ú
Joule (J)
The
derived unit of energy (
). It is the energy required to apply a force of one newton through a distance of one meter (1 N⋅m) or the work required to produce one watt of power for one second (1 W⋅s).
1 J = 1 N ⋅ m = 1 kg ⋅ m s
⋅ m = 1 W ⋅ s
KCl
Ú
LaBr
3
Ú
Lanthanum Bromide (LaBr
3
)
Substance to build
Ú
.
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LED Stabilization
Method to adjust for the drift of a
Ú
by measuring the light of a known reference
.
Linearization
Measurements relying on
Ú
require ways to transfer and amplify light. This is typically done by using a crystal mounted to a
Ú
Photo Multiplier Tube . Unfortunately, the
physics of this assembly introduces a non-proportionality between the input gamma ray energies and the processed electronic output signals. For high precision spectroscopy applications it is therefore inevitable to carefully gauge the assembly to map the non-proportional deviating energies on to the correct incident values. This process is referred to as Linearization.
Live Time (LT)
A detection system is able to record events during the live time, that is, while not being busy processing events in the
(cf
Local Maximum
Ú
278 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
Low Self-Discharge Nickel-Metal Hydride (LSD NiMH)
The type of rechargeable batteries built into the FLIR powerPACK ultra.
LSD NiMH
Ú
Low Self-Discharge Nickel-Metal Hydride
LT
Ú
MAC Address
Ú
Mass Number (A)
The total number of
and
Ú
Neutrons (together known as
Ú
) in an atomic
Ú
Also known as: Atomic Mass Number, Nucleon Number
MCS
Ú
Media Access Control Address (MAC Address)
A unique identi ier assigned to most network adapters or network interface cards by the manufacturer for identi ication in a network.
Metric Pre xes
Ú
Military Time
Ú
Moderator
A medium with a high content of hydrogen (e.g.
Ú
) reducing the speed of fast
Ú
Neutrons , thus turning them into thermal neutrons. Used for example, to enhance
Ú
Neutron Detection sensitivity for systems which can detect thermal neutrons only.
Multi Channel Scaling (MCS)
An acquisition mode for discrete
Spectra . All counts 𝑁 registered during a period Δ𝑡 are
stored in one channel. After that period, all counts are stored in the next channel, and so on
(Figure 244 , p.
280 ).
N42
Ú
*.n42
Common ile name suf ix for
Ú
iles.
NaI
Ú
Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM)
Ú
occurring in the Earth lithosphere or atmosphere, for example, potassium, uranium and their daughter products.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 279
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
( )
( )
( )
( )
Channel
Figure 244.
Multi Channel Scaling
Navstar Global Positioning System
Ú
Neutron
A subatomic particle with no electric charge, usually found in the
Ú
of atoms. Neutrons bound in nuclei are stable, free neutrons, however, undergo beta
with a mean lifetime of about 12 minutes. Free Neutrons having different energies are categorized by the
Ú
Neutron Temperature .
Neutron Detection
Thermal neutrons (
Ú
Neutron Temperature ) can be detected by observing their interaction with
like
3
He (
Ú
),
6
Li,
10
B, or
157
Gd. These interactions produce
Ú
or
Ú
Gamma Radiation which is subsequently detected. To detect fast neutrons (
Ú
Neutron Temperature ), a
Ú
must be applied.
Neutron Temperature
An energy scale for free
Ú
Neutrons . The most important categories are fast neutrons, having an energy substantially above 1 eV, slow Neutrons, with an energy below 0.4 eV and thermal neutrons yielding an energy about 0.025 eV. Fast neutrons are deccelerated or thermalized by a
Ú
.
Nickel-Metal Hydride (NiMH)
The type of rechargeable batteries built into the FLIR powerPACK plus.
NID
Nuclide Identi ication
NiMH
Ú
Nickel-Metal Hydride
NORM
Ú
Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material
Nuclear Fission
Ú
280 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
Nuclear Fusion
Ú
Fusion
Nucleon
Collective name for
Ú
Neutrons and
Protons , two subatomic particles building an atomic
Ú
Nucleon Number
Ú
Nucleus
The nucleus is a component of an
Atom , carrying the majority of the net mass and an electric
charge that is equal to the charge of all
that orbit the nucleus. A nucleus consists of
Ú
Neutrons and
Ú
, which are therefore also called
Ú
.
Nuclide
A nuclide is a
Ú
with a speci ied number of protons and neutrons, that is, having speci ic nuclear properties.
Nuclides are speci ied by the name of the chemical
which implies the
and the
Ú
, for example,
40
18
Ar or
40
19
K. Where sub- and superscripting are not possible or too challenging, nuclides are often written as Ar-40 or K-40.
OBEX
Ú
OBject EXchange (OBEX)
A communications protocol for the exchange of binary objects between devices. It is maintained by the Infrared Data Association but has also been adopted by the Bluetooth Special
Interest Group and the SyncML wing of the Open Mobile Alliance.
Also known as: IrOBEX
Pairing
A mechanism to establish a trusted connection between two devices communicating via Bluetooth requiring user interaction only during the irst connection of two particular devices.
PAN
Ú
Particle Radiation
A type of
Ú
Radiation , whose emission components carry a inite rest mass.
and
are examples for Particle Radiation.
PE
Ú
Peak
The place where a function or a measurement (or a graphic rendering thereof) is higher than in the close vicinity (Figure 242 , p.
274 ).
Also known as: Local Maximum
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 281
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
Personal Area Networking (PAN)
A
communications pro ile to connect a small number of devices over usually short distances.
PHA
Also known as: Piconet
Ú
Pulse Height Analyzer
Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT)
An extremely sensitive light detector used, for example, in conjunction with a
Ú
to register
.
Piconet
Ú
PIN
Personal Identi ication Number
PMMA
Ú
PMT
Ú
Polyethene
Ú
Polyethylene (PE, (C
2
H
4
) n
)
A substance usable as
Ú
for fast
Ú
Neutrons .
Also known as: Polyethene, Polymethylene, Polythene
Polymethyl Methacrylate (PMMA, (C
5
H
8
O
2
) n
)
A substance usable as
Ú
for fast
Ú
Neutrons .
Also known as: Acrylic Glass
Polymethylene
Ú
Polythene
Ú
Positron
A subatomic particle with a positive electric charge, counterpart of the
. It is emitted as
Potassium Chloride (KCl)
A salt containing natural
40
K used to calibrate radiation detection systems.
Proton
A subatomic particle with a positive electric charge. It builds the
of each atom, along with
Ú
Neutrons . A proton is also stable by itself and has a second identity as the hydrogen
+
.
282 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
Proton Number
Ú
Pulse Height Analyzer (PHA)
An instrument which accepts electronic pulses of varying heights from particle and event detectors, digitizes the pulses’ heights, and saves them in channels for spectral analysis.
Radiation
The propagation of energetic particles (
Ú
Particle Radiation ) or electromagnetic waves
(
Ú
) through a medium or space. Examples are
Ú
,
Ú
,
Ú
Gamma Radiation ,
Ú
Neutrons but also X-rays, radio waves, light, microwaves or heat.
The word “Radiation” commonly is used as an abbreviation for
Ú
Neutrons
Metal Foil
Lead (
82
Pb)
Figure 245.
Shielding of ionizing radiation (not to scale)
Radio Time
Ú
Radioactive Decay
Ú
Radiological Dispersal Device
Ú
Radiological Dispersion Device
Radiological Dispersion Device (RDD)
A weapon designed to spread radioactive material with the intent to kill or cause disruption.
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 283
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
Also known as: Radiological Dispersal Device, Dirty Bomb
Radionuclide
A radioactive
Ú
.
Railway Time
Ú
RDD
Ú
Radiological Dispersion Device
Reachback
The process of transmitting information from a ield deployed instrument to a lab or other facility for further analysis.
Reactor-Grade Plutonium (RGPu)
Reactor-Grade Plutonium is a special mixture of contains ≥19 %
240
Pu.
239
Pu,
240
Pu and other
Ú
240
Pu has a high rate of spontaneous ission leading to an increased number of
Ú
Neutrons and bears the risk of premature starting chain reactions. Further grades are
and
.
Real Time (RT)
The real or total time of a detection system comprises the
Ú
and the
Ú
.
Also known as: Total Time, True Time
Region of Interest (ROI)
A selected subset of samples within a
identi ied for a particular purpose.
rem
Ú
Remote Network Driver Interface Speci cation (RNDIS)
A Microsoft-proprietary protocol providing a virtual Ethernet connection used mostly via
Ú
.
Resolution
In spectroscopical application, the resolution gives a useful measure to estimate how well two or more
Ú
can be distinguished. It is consequently de ined as the width of a peak
– usually the most prominent line at 661.65 keV of
137
Cs. Because there are various ways to judge a peak width, it is a convention to use the
Ú
.
RGPu
Ú
RID
Ú
Identifying Device
RNDIS
Ú
Remote Network Driver Interface Speci ication
ROI
Ú
284 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
Röntgen Equivalent in Man (rem)
The röntgen equivalent in man is an old unit of radiation
Ú
)
100 rem = 1 Sv
RT
The continued use of rem is “strongly discouraged” by the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology.
Ú
Scintillation Counter
A device to measure
by amplifying the light emitted from a
Ú
with a
Ú
and quantifying the result.
Scintillator
A material emitting a lash of light when it absorbs
.
Semiconductor Radiation Detector
A semiconductor (for example
or
Ú
) placed between two electrodes registering electric pulses resulting from the travel of free electrons produced by incident
Ú
Gamma Radiation . The number of free electrons is proportional to the radiation’s energy.
SI (Système International d’Unités)
A metric and decimal system of units, standardized by the Bureau International des Poids et
Mesures (International Bureau of Weights and Measures).
Also known as: International System of Units
SI Pre xes
Ú
Sievert (Sv)
The
derived unit of dose equivalent. It attempts to re lect the biological effects of
Ú
as opposed to the physical aspects, which are characterized by the
Ú
(
J
1 Sv = 1 kg
= 1 m s
For
Ú
Gamma Radiation , these are the same base units as the
Ú
. To avoid confusion, do not use J/kg but always Gy for the absorbed dose and Sv for the dose equivalent.
SIM
Subscriber Identity Module, used for example in mobile phones.
Sodium Iodide (NaI)
Substance to build
Ú
.
SOP
Ú
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 285
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
Source Stabilization
Method to continuously adjust for the drift of a detection system by measuring the radiation of a known reference source.
*.spc
A ile format used by former measuring instruments to store spectrum data. Was replaced by the more versatile and standardized
format.
Speci c Activity
The
in
per amount of substance. The amount is usually given as mass for solid matter (Bq/kg, “speci ic activity” sensu stricto) or as volume for liquids (Bq/l, activity concentration).
Also known as: Activity Concentration
Spectrum
The continuous arrangement of the components of
Ú
Radiation in a progressive series according to a characteristic quantity such as wavelength, frequency, energy, charge, mass etc.
Using this arrangement as one axis, another quantity, e.g. intensity, can be plotted along a perpendicular axis
Digital spectra are discrete, that is they collect the plotted quantity into separate channels representing a (small) range of the characteristic quantity.
Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)
A set of instructions for a procedure to be executed always in exactly the same manner.
Also known as: Standing Operating Procedure
Standing Operating Procedure
Ú
Sv
Ú
Système International d’Unités
Ú
Technologically Enhanced Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (TENORM)
Ú
Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material
as used in, for example, oil and gas exploration, development and production operations.
TENORM
Ú
Technologically Enhanced Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material
Tethering
Using a mobile device such as a mobile phone to supply Internet access for another device which is otherwise unconnected, using the mobile device as a modem. This can be done through, for example,
Ú
wireless technology or cables (such as
Ú
286 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
Thermal Neutron
Ú
Neutron Temperature
Total Time
Ú
Trickle Charging
Charging a battery to balance its intrinsic self discharge thus maintaining the full capacity of the battery.
True Time
Ú
Uniform Resource Identi er (URI)
A string of characters used to identify a name or a resource on the Internet.
Unit Pre xes
Pre ixes for
Ú
units (Table
Table 4.
Pre ixes for units according to the Système International d’Unités (International System of Units)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Pre ix Symbol Decimal yotta zetta exa
Y
Z
E
1 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
1 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
1 000 000 000 000 000 000 peta tera giga mega kilo hecto deca
P
T
G
M k h da
1 000 000 000 000 000
1 000 000 000 000
1 000 000 000
1 000 000
1 000
100 deci centi milli micro d c m
µ
10
1
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.000 001 nano pico femto atto zepto yocto a z y n p f
0.000 000 001
0.000 000 000 001
0.000 000 000 000 001
0.000 000 000 000 000 001
0.000 000 000 000 000 000 001
0.000 000 000 000 000 000 000 001
Also known as: Metric Pre ixes, SI Pre ixes
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 287
D. Glossary FLIR Detection
Units of Time
The
base unit for time is the second. It may be pre ixed with the usual SI
Ú
to express smaller or larger quantities.
Units known from everyday life (Table
, p.
) are often used for larger quantities.
Table 5.
Units of time
Unit Symbol Relation
Second sec, s
Minute min, m
Hour h
Day d
Year a
60 sec
60 min
24 h
365.25 d
The Year is often pre ixed (see Table
, p.
) to express very large quantities like 1.3 Ga for
1.3 billion years (the
Ú
of
40
K).
Universal Serial Bus
Ú
URI
Ú
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
A speci ication to establish communication between various types of devices and a host controller, usually a personal computer.
UTC
Ú
Weapons-Grade Plutonium (WGPu)
A mixture of
239
Pu,
240
Pu and other
Isotopes , which contains less than 7 %
reduced amount of the spontaneous ission source
240
Pu. Due to its
240
Pu, the risk of a premature chain reaction start is decreased so that this blend of Plutonium is used for the weapon head assemblies.
Further grades are
and
Ú
.
WGPu
Ú
WGS84
Ú
World Geodetic System (WGS84)
A standard for use in cartography, geodesy, and navigation comprising a coordinate system for the Earth, a reference surface for raw altitude data, and a geoid de ining the nominal sea level.
The WGS release of 1984 with later revisions is used by
288 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection D. Glossary
XML (Extensible Markup Language)
A gratis open standard for encoding arbitrary data with their structure in textual iles.
Z
Ú
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 289
FLIR Detection INDEX
Index
- [key function], 35 , 41 , 42 , 44 ,
122 , 125 ,
127 ,
, 137 , 138 , 143 , 149 ,
153 – 155 ,
159 – 164 𝜎 Alarm [setting], 163 , 164
+ [key function], 35 , 38 , 39 , 41 , 42 , 44 ,
– 122 , 125 , 127 ,
137 , 138 , 143 , 149 ,
, 153 – 155 , 159 – 164
12-Hour Clock,
24-Hour Clock,
30 s [key function],
… [setting], 155
A
A,
𝛼 Particle,
𝛼 Radiation,
Absorbed Dose,
Accept [key function], 35 , 39 , 41 , 42 , 45 , 47 ,
– 122 , 125 , 127 ,
137 , 138 , 143 , 149 ,
, 153 – 155 , 159 – 164
Acknowledge [key function], 71 , 98
Acquisition Duration [property], 106
Acrylic Glass,
Activity,
Activity Concentration,
Adjustment,
Administration [web menu], 181
Advanced Menu [command],
Advanced Options (menu),
Alarm,
Alarm [setting],
164
Alarm [web page],
Alarm Indicators [command],
160
Alarm Indicators [web section],
Alarm Options (menu),
Alarms,
⋅ Gamma, 98
⋅ Neutrons, 101
Alarms [web page],
Alpha Particle,
Alpha Radiation,
Altitude [property], 132
Am-241 [key function], 116
American National Standards Institute (ANSI),
ANSI,
ANSI N42.42,
Army Time,
Astronomical Time,
Atom,
Atomic Mass,
Atomic Mass Number,
Atomic Number (Z),
Automated Mode, 93
Automated Mode Settings [command],
,
135
Available [setting],
Available Files [web section], 181
Available Memory [property], 130
B
𝛽 Particle,
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 291
INDEX FLIR Detection
𝛽 Radiation,
Background Radiation,
Backlight, 232
Backlight [setting], 124
Backup [web page],
Backup [web section],
Battery, 29
Becquerel (Bq),
Beeper [setting], 161
Beginning [property],
Beta Particle,
Beta Radiation,
Bluetooth, 232 ,
Bluetooth [command], 141
Bluetooth Device Name [setting], 145
Bluetooth Periphery
© [command],
Bluetooth SPP Settings
© [command],
Bluetooth SPP Settings
© [web page],
Bluetooth SPP Settings
© [web section],
Bluetooth SPP Status
© [command],
Bluetooth SPP
© (menu),
Bq,
Bulk Download [web page],
C
(C
2
H
4
) n
,
(C
5
H
8
O
2
) n
,
Cadmium Zinc Telluride (CZT, CdZnTe),
Calibration,
Calibration [command],
115
Calibration [key function], 114
Cancel [key function], 35 , 39 , 41 , 43 , 46 , 47 ,
,
111 ,
– 122 , 125 , 127 – 129 , 133 ,
, 137 ,
138 , 143 , 149 ,
, 153 – 155 , 159 – 164
CBRNE,
CdZnTe,
Cesium Lithium Yttrium Chloride (CLYC,
Cs
2
LiYCl
6
:Ce),
Change [key function],
Change device [key function], 224
Change Device [setting], 145
Change Password (menu),
Channel [key function], 114
Chemical Element,
Choose [key function], 138
Clear [key function], 108 , 111 , 116 , 129
Clear Markers [key function], 110
Clear Password [command],
129
Clock, 29 , 125 ,
Clock [web section],
Clock Settings [command],
125
CLYC,
Co-60 [key function], 116
Colors [setting], 123
Commands
⋅ Advanced Menu,
⋅ Alarm Indicators,
160
⋅ Automated Mode Settings,
, 135
⋅ Bluetooth, 141
⋅ Bluetooth Periphery
©,
⋅ Bluetooth SPP Settings
©,
⋅ Bluetooth SPP Status
©,
⋅ Calibration,
, 115
⋅ Clear Password,
129
⋅ Clock Settings,
125
⋅ Connectivity Options,
⋅ Current Alarm State,
,
, 165
⋅ Display Settings,
, 122
⋅ Dose Alarm Thresholds,
, 161
⋅ Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds,
,
⋅ Dose Rate Settings,
, 159
⋅ Download Settings,
154
⋅ Erase All Alarms,
, 133
⋅ Erase All Screenshots,
,
⋅ Erase All Spectra,
133
292 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection
⋅ Finder Settings,
157
⋅ Gamma, Neutron Counters,
, 155
⋅ GPS Settings,
127
⋅ Identi ication Settings,
116
⋅ Mass Storage,
⋅ Network,
, 152
⋅ Neutron Alarm Thresholds, 163
⋅ Neutron Alarm Thresholds
©,
⋅ Nuclide Severity,
120
⋅ Nuclide Usage,
119
⋅ Nuclide Visibility,
⋅ Presets,
, 121
⋅ Remote Server Settings,
, 149
⋅ Report Settings,
153
⋅ Reset Factory Settings,
, 132
⋅ Self Test,
,
⋅ Send Identi ication, 137
⋅ Send Identi ication
©,
⋅ Send Spectrum, 140
⋅ Send Spectrum
©,
⋅ Set Password,
⋅ Show Status,
, 130
⋅ Spectrum,
, 106
Con idence [setting], 117
Con irm [key function], 87
Connection String [setting],
Connection String: [property], 227
Connectivity [web page],
Connectivity Options (menu),
Connectivity Options [command],
CONOPS, CONOPs, ConOps,
Continental Time,
Continue [key function], 65 , 76 , 93 , 117
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC),
Count,
Counting Duration [property], 156
Counts [setting], 122
INDEX
Cs
2
LiYCl
6
:Ce,
Cs-137 [key function], 116
Curie,
Current Alarm State [command],
,
, 165
Cursor Right
· [key function],
109
CZT,
D
Data [web menu],
Data Logging (menu),
Data Schemata [web section],
Data Types [web section],
Date, 29 , 125 ,
Date [setting], 127
Date Selection [web section],
Dead Time (DT),
Dead Time [property], 106
Decay,
Delete [key function], 44 ,
154
Deutsches Institut für Normung (DIN),
Deviation [property], 116
Device Name [setting], 152
DHS,
Dial-Up Networking (DUN),
DIN,
Dirty Bomb,
Disconnect [setting], 143
Discoverable [property], 142
Disintegration,
Display Settings [command],
, 122
Displayed Unit [setting], 159
DNDO,
Dose,
Dose [key function], 89 , 91
Dose Alarm Thresholds [command],
, 161
Dose Duration [property], 156
Dose Rate,
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 293
INDEX FLIR Detection
Dose Rate Alarm Thresholds [command],
,
Dose Rate Mode, 86
Dose Rate Settings [command],
, 159
Down [key function], 36 – 38 , 82 ,
122 , 125 ,
127 ,
, 137 , 143 , 145 , 148 ,
153 – 155 ,
159 – 164 , 225
Download Options [web section],
Download Settings [command],
, 154
DT,
DU [key function], 116
DUN,
Duration [property],
Duration [setting], 117
E
Electromagnetic Radiation,
Electron,
Electron Volt (eV),
Element,
Enable SPP [property], 142
Enable SPP [setting], 143
Energy [key function], 114
Equivalent Dose,
Erase [key function], 133 ,
Erase All Alarms [command],
, 133
Erase All Screenshots [command],
Erase All Spectra [command],
133
Erase Data (menu),
eV,
Exit [key function], 36 , 73 , 91 – 93 ,
108 ,
113 , 116 ,
– 122 , 125 , 127 ,
, 132 ,
,
137 , 139 , 142 , 143 , 145 , 149 ,
152 – 155 ,
157 , 159 – 165 , 227
Extensible Markup Language,
Extra Duration [setting], 117
F
False Alarm,
False Alarm Rate (FAR),
FAR,
Fast Neutron,
FGPu,
File Types
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
*.n42
, 154 , 202 ,
*.spc
, 154 , 202 ,
*.spe
, 154 , 202 ,
*.xml
, 183 ,
⋅
*.zip
, 56 , 197 , 198 , 202 , 203
Finder [key function], 73 , 75 ,
Finder Mode,
, 232
Finder Settings [command],
157
Fission,
Fuel-Grade Plutonium (FGPu),
Full Width at Half Maximum (FWHM),
Fusion,
FWHM, 274
G
𝛾 Radiation, 274
Gamma Alarms [web section],
Gamma Count [property], 106
Gamma Counts [property], 156
Gamma Dose [property], 156
Gamma Radiation, 274
Gamma Ray Detection, 274
Gamma, Neutron Counters [command],
,
155
Ge, 274
Geiger–Müller Tube (GM Tube), 274
General [web page],
General Options (menu),
Germanium (Ge),
Global Positioning System (GPS),
GM Tube,
294 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection INDEX
GMT,
GPS, 29 , 30 , 125 , 232 ,
GPS [key function], 130
GPS [property], 131
GPS [setting],
GPS [web section],
GPS and Clock [web page],
GPS Settings [command],
, 127
Gray (Gy),
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT),
Gy,
H
Half Life,
HAZMAT, Hazmat, HazMat,
3
He Detector,
Home [web menu],
Horizontal Coordinates [property], 106
HPGe,
HPRDS,
HTTP,
HTTP URI [setting],
HTTP URI: [property],
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP),
I
IANA,
Identi ication [web section],
Identi ication Mode, 90
Identi ication Options (menu),
Identi ication Settings [command],
116
Identi ications [web page],
Identify [key function], 75 , 90 , 113
Ignore [key function], 255
Info [web page],
Insert [key function], 45 ,
154
Install [key function], 255
Integration Time [setting],
International Organization for
Standardization,
International System of Units,
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA),
Internet Protocol (IP),
Intrinsic Activity,
Ion,
Ionizing Radiation,
IP,
IP Address,
IP Address [property], 130
IrOBEX,
ISO (International Organization for
Standardization),
Isobar,
Isomer,
Isotone,
Isotope,
J
J,
Joule (J),
K
K-40 [key function], 116
KCl,
Key Functions
⋅ +, 35 , 38 , 39 , 41 , 42 , 44 ,
– 122 , 125 , 127 ,
, 137 , 138 , 143 , 149 ,
, 153 – 155 ,
159 – 164
⋅ -, 35 , 41 , 42 , 44 ,
122 , 125 , 127 ,
,
137 , 138 , 143 , 149 ,
153 – 155 ,
159 – 164
⋅ 30 s,
⋅ Accept, 35 , 39 , 41 , 42 , 45 , 47 ,
122 , 125 ,
127 ,
, 137 , 138 , 143 , 149 ,
,
153 – 155 , 159 – 164
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 295
INDEX FLIR Detection
⋅ Acknowledge, 71 , 98
⋅ Am-241, 116
⋅ Calibration, 114
⋅ Cancel, 35 , 39 , 41 , 43 , 46 , 47 ,
, 111 ,
– 122 , 125 , 127 – 129 , 133 ,
137 ,
138 , 143 , 149 ,
153 – 155 , 159 – 164
⋅ Change,
⋅ Change device, 224
⋅ Channel, 114
⋅ Choose, 138
⋅ Clear, 108 , 111 , 116 , 129
⋅ Clear Markers, 110
⋅ Co-60, 116
⋅ Con irm, 87
⋅ Continue, 65 , 76 , 93 , 117
⋅ Cs-137, 116
⋅ Cursor Right
·,
109
⋅ Delete, 44 ,
154
⋅ Dose, 89 , 91
⋅ Down, 36 – 38 , 82 ,
122 , 125 , 127 ,
137 , 143 , 145 , 148 ,
153 – 155 ,
159 – 164 , 225
⋅ DU, 116
⋅ Energy, 114
⋅ Erase, 133 ,
⋅ Exit, 36 , 73 , 91 – 93 ,
, 108 , 113 , 116 ,
– 122 , 125 , 127 ,
, 132 ,
, 137 ,
139 , 142 , 143 , 145 , 149 ,
, 152 – 155 ,
157 , 159 – 165 , 227
⋅ Finder, 73 , 75 ,
⋅ GPS, 130
⋅ Identify, 75 , 90 , 113
⋅ Ignore, 255
⋅ Insert, 45 ,
, 154
⋅ Install, 255
⋅ K-40, 116
⋅ L, 47
⋅ Left, 35 , 41 – 43 , 127 ,
, 154 ,
, 163
⋅ Linear, 114
⋅ Load, 112
⋅ Logarithmic, 114
⋅ LT, 114
⋅ M, 47
⋅ Mark Channel, 109
⋅ Mn-54, 116
⋅ Mute, 71 , 98 , 165
⋅
¶ Cursor Left,
109
⋅ Na-22, 116
⋅ OK, 47
⋅ Options,
90
⋅ Preset, 115
⋅ Presets, 115
⋅ R, 47
⋅ Reset, 132 , 157
⋅ Reset Dose, 157
⋅ Right, 35 , 41 – 43 , 127 ,
, 154 ,
, 163
⋅ RT, 114
⋅ Save, 112
⋅ Search, 145 , 224 , 225
⋅ Select, 36 , 38 – 41 , 43 , 46 , 82 ,
– 122 , 125 ,
127 ,
, 137 , 143 , 146 , 148 ,
,
153 – 155 , 159 – 164 , 225
⋅ Send, 81 , 92 , 114 , 115 , 138
⋅ Send Identi ication, 92 , 114
⋅ Send Spectrum, 115
⋅ Settings, 142
⋅ Shut Down, 65
⋅ Skip, 35 , 39 , 41 – 43 , 45 – 47 , 77 , 81 , 92 , 107 ,
, 119 , 121
⋅ Spectrum, 77 , 93
⋅ Square Root, 114
⋅ Start, 92 , 107 ,
, 151
⋅ Start Search, 82 , 145
⋅ Stop,
, 107 , 108 , 157 ,
296 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection INDEX
⋅ Switch Off,
⋅ System, 130
⋅ Th-232, 116
⋅ U-235, 116
⋅ Up, 119 – 121
⋅ Ymax/2, 114
⋅ Ymax/4, 114
⋅ Zoom 1.5 MeV, 110
⋅ Zoom 1:1, 110
⋅ Zoom 3 MeV, 110
⋅ Zoom ROI, 110
Key Functions [setting], 124
L
L [key function], 47
LaBr
3
,
Language [setting], 124
Lanthanum Bromide (LaBr
3
),
Latitude [property], 132
LED,
LED Stabilization,
LEDs [setting], 160
Left [key function], 35 , 41 – 43 , 127 ,
154 ,
, 163
Linear [key function], 114
Linearization,
Live Screen [web page],
Live Spectrum [web page], 181
Live Time (LT),
Live Time [setting], 122
Load [key function], 112
Local Area Network [web section],
Local Maximum,
Location, 29 , 30
Logarithmic [key function], 114
Longitude [property], 132
Low Self-Discharge Nickel-Metal Hydride (LSD
NiMH),
LSD NiMH,
LT,
LT [key function], 114
M
M [key function], 47
MAC Address,
Main Menu (menu),
Maintenance (menu),
Mark Channel [key function], 109
Mass Number (A),
Mass Storage [command],
MCS,
Measurement [web section],
Measurements [property], 136
Media Access Control Address (MAC Address),
Menus
⋅ Advanced Options,
⋅ Alarm Options,
⋅ Bluetooth SPP
©,
⋅ Change Password,
⋅ Connectivity Options,
⋅ Data Logging,
⋅ Erase Data,
⋅ General Options,
⋅ Identi ication Options,
⋅ Main Menu,
⋅ Maintenance,
⋅ More Options,
⋅ Options Menu,
⋅ Send Data
©,
Metric Pre ixes,
Military Time,
Mn-54 [key function], 116
Moderator,
More Options (menu),
Multi Channel Scaling (MCS),
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 297
INDEX FLIR Detection
Mute [key function], 71 , 98 , 165
¶ Cursor Left [key function],
109
N
N42,
.n42 (2006) [setting], 155
.n42 (2012) [setting], 154
*.n42
[ ile type], 154 , 202 ,
*.n42
,
Na-22 [key function], 116
NaI,
Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material
(NORM),
Navstar Global Positioning System, 280
Network [command],
, 152
Neutron, 280
Neutron Alarm
© [property],
200
Neutron Alarm Thresholds [command], 163
Neutron Alarm Thresholds
© [command],
Neutron Alarms
© [web section],
Neutron Count [property], 106
Neutron Detection, 280
Neutron Rate [property], 157
Neutron Temperature, 280
Neutrons [property], 157
Next Measurement [property], 136
Nickel-Metal Hydride (NiMH), 280
NID, 280
NiMH, 280
Nº [property],
202 ,
NORM, 280
Nuclear Fission, 280
Nuclear Fusion,
Nucleon,
Nucleon Number,
Nucleus,
Nuclide,
Nuclide [property], 115
Nuclide Severity [command],
120
Nuclide Usage [command],
119
Nuclide Visibility [command],
,
Nuclides [web page],
Nuclides… [setting],
– 120
O
OBEX,
OBject EXchange (OBEX),
OK [key function], 47
Open-Source Software [web section],
Operator Name [setting], 153
Options [key function],
90
Options Menu (menu),
Overload, 87
P
Pairing,
PAN,
Particle Radiation,
Password [setting],
Password [web page], 181
Password: [property], 227
PE,
Peak,
Peak FWHM [property], 116
Peak Position [property], 116
Personal Area Networking (PAN),
PHA,
Phone Number [setting],
Phone Number: [property], 227
Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT),
Piconet,
PIN,
PMMA,
PMT,
Polyethene,
Polyethylene (PE, (C
2
H
4
) n
),
298 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection INDEX
Polymethyl Methacrylate (PMMA, (C
5
H
8
O
2
) n
),
Polymethylene,
Polythene,
Positron,
Potassium Chloride (KCl),
Power Saving, 231
Preset [key function], 115
Presets [command],
, 121
Presets [key function], 115
Properties
⋅ Acquisition Duration, 106
⋅ Altitude, 132
⋅ Available Memory, 130
⋅ Beginning,
⋅ Connection String:, 227
⋅ Counting Duration, 156
⋅ Dead Time, 106
⋅ Deviation, 116
⋅ Discoverable, 142
⋅ Dose Duration, 156
⋅ Duration,
⋅ Enable SPP, 142
⋅ Gamma Count, 106
⋅ Gamma Counts, 156
⋅ Gamma Dose, 156
⋅ GPS, 131
⋅ Horizontal Coordinates, 106
⋅ HTTP URI:,
⋅ IP Address, 130
⋅ Latitude, 132
⋅ Longitude, 132
⋅ Measurements, 136
⋅ Neutron Alarm
©,
200
⋅ Neutron Count, 106
⋅ Neutron Rate, 157
⋅ Neutrons, 157
⋅ Next Measurement, 136
⋅ Nº,
, 202 ,
⋅ Nuclide, 115
⋅ Password:, 227
⋅ Peak FWHM, 116
⋅ Peak Position, 116
⋅ Phone Number:, 227
⋅ Real Time, 202
⋅ Satellites, 131
⋅ Saved on,
, 202
⋅ Scaling, 106
⋅ Screenshots, 130
⋅ Serial Number, 130
⋅ Software, 131
⋅ Start Time, 202
⋅ Status, 142
⋅ System, 130
⋅ Type,
207
⋅ Uncertainty, 116
⋅ User Name:, 227
⋅ Value, 207
Proton,
Proton Number, 283
Pulse Height Analyzer (PHA), 283
R
R [key function], 47
Radiation, 283
Radio Time, 283
Radioactive Decay, 283
Radiological Dispersal Device, 283
Radiological Dispersion Device (RDD), 283
Radionuclide,
Railway Time,
RDD,
Reachback, 219 ,
Reactor-Grade Plutonium (RGPu),
Real Time (RT),
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015 299
INDEX FLIR Detection
Real Time [property], 202
Real Time [setting], 122
Region of Interest (ROI),
rem,
Remote Network Driver Interface Speci ication
(RNDIS),
Remote Server [web section],
Remote Server Settings [command],
, 149
Report Settings [command],
153
Reports [web section],
Reset, 66
Reset [key function], 132 , 157
Reset Dose [key function], 157
Reset Factory Settings [command],
, 132
Resolution,
Resources [web page],
Restore [web section],
RGPu,
RID,
Right [key function], 35 , 41 – 43 , 127 ,
154 ,
, 163
RNDIS,
ROI,
Röntgen Equivalent in Man (rem),
RT,
RT [key function], 114
S
Satellites [property], 131
Save [key function], 112
Saved on [property],
202
Saving Energy, 231
Saving Power, 231
Scaling [property], 106
Scintillation Counter,
Scintillator,
Screenshot, 49
Screenshots [property], 130
Screenshots [web page],
SD1000… [setting], 225
Search [key function], 145 , 224 , 225
Select [key function], 36 , 38 – 41 , 43 , 46 , 82 ,
122 , 125 , 127 ,
137 , 143 , 146 , 148 ,
153 – 155 , 159 – 164 , 225
Self Test [command],
Semiconductor Radiation Detector,
Send [key function], 81 , 92 , 114 , 115 , 138
Send Data
© (menu),
Send Identi ication [command], 137
Send Identi ication [key function], 92 , 114
Send Identi ication
© [command],
Send Spectrum [command], 140
Send Spectrum [key function], 115
Send Spectrum
© [command],
Sensitivity [setting],
Serial Number [property], 130
Service [web section],
Set Password [command],
Settings
⋅ 𝜎 Alarm, 163 , 164
⋅ Alarm,
164
⋅ Available,
⋅ Backlight, 124
⋅ Beeper, 161
⋅ Bluetooth Device Name, 145
⋅ Change Device, 145
⋅ Colors, 123
⋅ Con idence, 117
⋅ Connection String,
⋅ Counts, 122
⋅ Date, 127
⋅ Device Name, 152
⋅ Disconnect, 143
⋅ Displayed Unit, 159
⋅ Duration, 117
300 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection
⋅ Enable SPP, 143
⋅ Extra Duration, 117
⋅ GPS,
⋅ HTTP URI,
⋅ Integration Time,
⋅ Key Functions, 124
⋅ Language, 124
⋅ LEDs, 160
⋅ Live Time, 122
⋅ .n42 (2006), 155
⋅ .n42 (2012), 154
⋅ Nuclides…,
120
⋅ Operator Name, 153
⋅ Password,
⋅ Phone Number,
⋅ Real Time, 122
⋅ SD1000…, 225
⋅ Sensitivity,
⋅ Severity,
⋅ Time, 127
⋅ Time Interval, 135
⋅ Time Zone, 126
⋅ Timeout, 124 , 143
⋅ U, Pu,
⋅ Usage,
⋅ USB Subnet, 153
⋅ User Name,
⋅ …, 155
⋅ Vibrator, 161
⋅ Voice Phone, 153
⋅ Warning,
– 164
Settings [key function], 142
Settings [web menu],
Severity [setting],
Show Status [command],
, 130
Shut Down [key function], 65
Shutting Down, 64
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
INDEX
SI (Système International d’Unités),
SI Pre ixes,
Sievert (Sv),
SIM,
Skip [key function], 35 , 39 , 41 – 43 , 45 – 47 , 77 ,
81 , 92 , 107 ,
, 119 , 121
Sodium Iodide (NaI),
Software [property], 131
Software Update [web page], 181
SOP,
Source Stabilization,
*.spc
,
*.spc
[ ile type], 154 , 202 ,
*.spe
[ ile type], 154 , 202 ,
Speci ic Activity,
Spectra [web page],
Spectrum,
Spectrum [command],
, 106
Spectrum [key function], 77 , 93
Spectrum Acquisition, 232
Square Root [key function], 114
Standard Operating Procedure (SOP),
Standing Operating Procedure,
Start [key function], 92 , 107 ,
, 151
Start Search [key function], 82 , 145
Start Time [property], 202
Starting Up, 62
Status [property], 142
Stop [key function],
, 107 , 108 , 157 ,
Sv,
Switch Off [key function],
Switching Off, 64
Switching On, 62
System [key function], 130
System [property], 130
System [web section],
System Files [web page], 181
301
INDEX FLIR Detection
Système International d’Unités,
T
Technologically Enhanced Naturally Occurring
Radioactive Material (TENORM),
TENORM,
Tethering,
Th-232 [key function], 116
Thermal Neutron,
Time, 29 , 125 ,
Time [setting], 127
Time Interval [setting], 135
Time Zone [setting], 126
Timeout [setting], 124 , 143
Total Time,
Trickle Charging,
True Time,
Type [property],
, 207
U
U, Pu [setting],
U-235 [key function], 116
Uncertainty [property], 116
Uniform Resource Identi ier (URI),
Unit Pre ixes,
Units of Time,
Universal Serial Bus,
Up [key function], 119 – 121
URI,
Usage [setting],
USB (Universal Serial Bus),
USB Subnet [setting], 153
User Interface [web section],
User Name [setting],
User Name: [property], 227
UTC,
V
Value [property], 207
Vibrator [setting], 161
Voice Phone [setting], 153
W
Warning [setting],
– 164
Warnings,
⋅ Gamma, 98
⋅ Neutrons, 101
Weapons-Grade Plutonium (WGPu),
Web Menus
⋅ Administration, 181
⋅ Data,
⋅ Home,
⋅ Settings,
Web Pages
⋅ Alarm,
⋅ Alarms,
⋅ Backup,
⋅ Bluetooth SPP Settings
©,
⋅ Bulk Download,
⋅ Connectivity,
⋅ General,
⋅ GPS and Clock,
⋅ Identi ications,
⋅ Info,
⋅ Live Screen,
⋅ Live Spectrum, 181
⋅ Nuclides,
⋅ Password, 181
⋅ Resources,
⋅ Screenshots,
⋅ Software Update, 181
⋅ Spectra,
⋅ System Files, 181
Web Sections
⋅ Alarm Indicators,
⋅ Available Files, 181
⋅ Backup,
302 identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
FLIR Detection
⋅ Bluetooth SPP Settings
©,
⋅ Clock,
⋅ Data Schemata,
⋅ Data Types,
⋅ Date Selection,
⋅ Download Options,
⋅ Gamma Alarms,
⋅ GPS,
⋅ Identi ication,
⋅ Local Area Network,
⋅ Measurement,
⋅ Neutron Alarms
©,
⋅ Open-Source Software,
⋅ Remote Server,
⋅ Reports,
⋅ Restore,
⋅ Service,
⋅ System,
⋅ User Interface,
WGPu,
WGS84,
World Geodetic System (WGS84),
X
XML (Extensible Markup Language),
*.xml
[ ile type], 183 ,
Y
Ymax/2 [key function], 114
Ymax/4 [key function], 114
Z
Z,
*.zip
[ ile type], 56 , 197 , 198 , 202 , 203
Zoom 1.5 MeV [key function], 110
Zoom 1:1 [key function], 110
Zoom 3 MeV [key function], 110
Zoom ROI [key function], 110
identiFINDER
®
R300/en/2014.4(13623)/Feb2015
INDEX
303
Europe, Africa, Middle East
FLIR Detection, Inc.
Luxemburgstraat 2
2321 Meer
Belgium
T
+ 32 (0) 3665.5106
v
+ 32 (0) 3303.5624
Americas
FLIR Detection, Inc.
100 Midland Road
Oak Ridge, TN 37830
USA
T
+ 1.865.220.8700
v
+ 1.865.220.7181
k radiation.support@ ir.com
m detectionsupport.com/radiation/
Asia Paci c
FLIR Detection, Inc.
3 Pickering Street #03-49
Nankin Row
Singapore 048660
T
+ 65.6822.1595
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement